[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2001068843A1 - Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor - Google Patents

Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2001068843A1
WO2001068843A1 PCT/EP2001/002925 EP0102925W WO0168843A1 WO 2001068843 A1 WO2001068843 A1 WO 2001068843A1 EP 0102925 W EP0102925 W EP 0102925W WO 0168843 A1 WO0168843 A1 WO 0168843A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
galanin receptor
polypeptide
galanin
receptor
polynucleotide
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/EP2001/002925
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Shyam Ramakrishnan
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Bayer AG
Original Assignee
Bayer AG
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Bayer AG filed Critical Bayer AG
Priority to AU44207/01A priority Critical patent/AU4420701A/en
Priority to EP01917091A priority patent/EP1268779A1/en
Publication of WO2001068843A1 publication Critical patent/WO2001068843A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/705Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
    • C07K14/72Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants for hormones
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • the invention relates to the area of G-protein coupled receptors. More particularly, it relates to the area of galanin receptor-like G protein coupled receptors and their regulation for therapeutic purposes.
  • GPCR G-protein coupled receptors
  • GPCRs include receptors for such diverse agents as dopamine, calcitonin, adrenergic hormones, endothelin, cAMP, adenosine, acetylcholine, serotonin, histamine, thrombin, kinin, follicle stimulating hormone, opsins, endothelial differentiation gene-1, rhodopsins, odorants, cytomegalovirus, G-proteins themselves, effector proteins such as phospholipase C, adenyl cyclase, and phosphodiesterase, and actuator proteins such as protein kinase A and protein kinase C.
  • GPCRs possess seven conserved membrane-spanning domains connecting at least eight divergent hydrophilic loops. GPCRs (also known as 7TM receptors) have been characterized as including these seven conserved hydrophobic stretches of about 20 to 30 amino acids, connecting at least eight divergent hydrophilic loops. Most GPCRs have single conserved cysteine residues in each of the first two extracellular loops, which form disulfide bonds that are believed to stabilize functional protein structure. The seven fransmembrane regions are designated as TM1, TM2, TM3, TM4, TM5, TM6, and TM7. TM3 has been implicated in signal fransduction.
  • Phosphorylation and lipidation (palmitylation or farnesylation) of cysteine residues can influence signal fransduction of some GPCRs.
  • Most GPCRs contain potential phosphorylation sites within the third cytoplasmic loop and/or the carboxy terminus.
  • GPCRs such as the ⁇ -adrenergic receptor, phosphorylation by protein kinase A and/or specific receptor kinases mediates receptor desensitization.
  • the ligand binding sites of GPCRs are believed to comprise hydrophilic sockets formed by several GPCR fransmembrane domains.
  • the hydrophilic sockets are su ⁇ ounded by hydrophobic residues of the GPCRs.
  • the hydrophilic side of each GPCR fransmembrane helix is postulated to face inward and form a polar ligand binding site.
  • TM3 has been implicated in several GPCRs as having a ligand binding site, such as the TM3 aspartate residue.
  • TM5 serines, a TM6 asparagine, and TM6 or TM7 phenylalanines or tyrosines also are implicated in ligand binding.
  • GPCRs are coupled inside the cell by heterotrimeric G-proteins to various infracellular enzymes, ion channels, and transporters (see Johnson et al., Endoc. Rev.
  • G-protein alpha-subunits preferentially stimulate particular effectors to modulate various biological functions in a cell.
  • Phosphorylation of cytoplasmic residues of GPCRs is an important mechanism for the regulation of some GPCRs.
  • the effect of hormone binding is the activation of the enzyme, adenylate cyclase, inside the cell. Enzyme activation by hormones is dependent on the presence of the nucleotide GTP. GTP also influences hormone binding.
  • a G-protein connects the hormone receptor to adenylate cyclase. G-protein exchanges GTP for bound GDP when activated by a hormone receptor.
  • the GTP-carrying form then binds to activated adenylate cyclase. Hydrolysis of GTP to GDP, catalyzed by the G-protein itself, returns the G-protein to its basal, inactive form. Thus, the G-protein serves a
  • hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis coupled with its potent hormonal effects has led to the suggestion that galanin may play an integral role in the hormonal response to stress (Bartfai et al., 1993).
  • galanin receptors in the CNS generally complements that of galanin peptide, with high levels of galanin binding observed in the hypothalamus, amygdala, hippocampus, brainstem and dorsal spinal cord (Skofitsch et al., 1986; Merchenthaler et al., 1993; Bartfai et al., 1993). Accordingly, agents modulating the activity of galanin receptors would have multiple potential therapeutic applications in the CNS. One of the most important of these is the regulation of food intake. Galanin injected into the paraventricular nucleus (PVN) of the hypothalamus stimulates feeding in satiated rats
  • Galanin receptors elsewhere in the CNS may also serve as therapeutic targets.
  • galanin In the spinal cord galanin is released from the terminals of sensory neurons as well as spinal interneurons and appears to play a role in the regulation of pain threshold (Wiesenfeld-Hallin et al., 1992).
  • Intrathecal galanin potentiates the anti-nociceptive effects of morphine in rats and produces analgesia when administered alone (Wiesenfeld-Hallin et al., 1993; Post et al, 1988); galanin receptor agonists may therefore be useful as analgesic agents in the spinal cord.
  • Galanin may also play a role in the development of Alzheimer's disease.
  • the chimeric galanin analogue M15 acts as antagonist at CNS galanin receptors (Bartfai et al., 1991) but as a full agonist in gastrointestinal smooth muscle (Gu et al, 1993).
  • the galanin-receptor ligand M40 acts as a weak agonist in RINm5F insulinoma cells and a full antagonist in brain (Bartfai et al, 1993a).
  • the pharmacological profile of galanin receptors in RINm5F cells can be further distinguished from those in brain by the differential affinities of [D-Tyr 2 ]- and [D-Phe 2 ]-gaIanin analogues (Lagny- Pourmir et al., 1989).
  • the chimeric galanin analogue M35 displaces 125 I-galanin binding to RINm5F membranes in a biphasic manner, suggesting the presence of multiple galanin receptor subtypes, in this cell line (Gregersen et al., 1993). Multiple galanin receptor subtypes may also co-exist within the CNS.
  • Galanm receptors in the dorsal hippocampus exhibit high affinity for Gal (1-15) but not for Gal (1-29) (Hedlund et al., 1992), suggesting that endogenous proteolytic processing may release bioactive fragments of galanin to act at distinct receptors.
  • the rat pituitary exhibits high-affinity binding for 125 I-Bolton and Hunter (N-terminus)- labeled galanin (1-29) but not for [ 125 I]Tyr 26 -porcine galanin (Wynick et ah, 1993), suggesting that the pituitary galanin receptor is a C-terminus-preferring subtype.
  • Spinal cord galanin binding sites while similar to those in brain, show an affinity for the chimeric peptide antagonist M35 intermediate between the brain and smooth muscle (Bartfai et al., 1991), raising the possibility of further heterogeneity.
  • a galanin receptor cDNA was recently isolated by expression cloning from a human Bowes melanoma cell line (Habert-Ortoli et al., 1994).
  • the pharmacological profile exhibited by this receptor is similar to that observed in brain and pancreas, and on that basis the receptor has been termed GALR1.
  • the cloned human GALR1 receptor binds native human, porcine and rat galanin with about 1 nM affinity (Kj vs. 125 I- galanin) and porcine galanin 1-16 at a slightly lower affinity (about 5 nM).
  • Porcine galanin 3-29 does not bind to the receptor.
  • the GALR1 receptor appears to couple to inhibition of adenylate cyclase, with half-maximal inhibition of forskolin-stimulated cAMP production by 1 nM galanin, and maximal inhibition occu ⁇ ing at about l ⁇ M.
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
  • Yet another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • a test compound is contacted with a galanin receptor-like polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of: amino acid sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; and
  • a test compound hich binds to the galanin receptor-like polypeptide is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor- like GPCR.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • a test compound is contacted with a polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3;
  • a test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • the agent can work by decreasing the amount of the galanin receptor-like GPCR through interacting with the galanin receptor-like GPCR mRNA.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which regulate the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • a test compound is contacted with a galanin receptor-like polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
  • a galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide is detected.
  • a test compound which increases galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide relative to galanin receptor-like GPCR activity in the absence of the test compound is thereby identified as a potential agent for increasing the activity of galanin receptorlike GPCR.
  • a test compound which decreases galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide relative to galanin receptor-like GPCR activity in the absence of the test compound is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • Yet another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • a test compound is contacted with a galanin receptor-like product of a polynucleotide which comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
  • nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3;
  • a test compound which binds to the galanin receptor-like product is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • Still another embodiment of the invention is a method of reducing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • a cell is contacted with a reagent which specifically binds to a polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or the product encoded by the polynucleotide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3; and the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3.
  • the invention thus provides a human galanin receptor-like GPCR which can be used to identify galanin analogs as well as compounds which may act as galanin antago- nists at the receptor site.
  • Galanin receptor-like GPCR and fragments thereof also are useful in raising specific antibodies which can block the receptor and effectively prevent galanin binding.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount of a galanin receptor-like GPCR or polypeptide can be used to treat any disorder resulting from or associated with an excess of circulating galanin.
  • Fig. 1 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • Fig. 2 shows the amino acid sequence deduced from the DNA-sequence of Fig.1.
  • Fig. 3 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • the invention relates to an isolated polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide and being selected from the group consisting of:
  • Human galanin receptor-like GPCR comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2.
  • a coding sequence for human galanin receptorlike GPCR is shown in SEQ ID NO:3. This sequence is contained within the longer sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:l.
  • Human galanin receptor-like GPCR is 25 % identical to the human galanin receptor encoded on chromosome 5. Therefore, human galanin receptor-like GPCR is expected to be useful for the same purposes as previously identified galanin receptors.
  • This discovery provides a novel approach, through the use of heterologous expression systems, to develop subtype-selective, high-affinity, non-peptide compounds that could serve as therapeutic agents for, inter alia, eating disorders, including obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, pain, depression, ischemia, and
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptides according to the invention comprise at least 10,
  • a galanin receptor-like polypeptide of the invention therefore can be a portion of a galanin receptor-like GPCR, a full-length galanin receptor-like GPCR, or a fusion protein comprising all or a portion of a galanin receptor- like GPCR.
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptides preferably bind galanin or a galanin analog.
  • Activity of a GPCR such as a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be measured using a detectably labeled galanin or galanin analog or by any of a variety of functional assays in which a biological activity mediated by the galanin receptor-like polypeptide results in an observable change in the level of some second messenger system (described in the specific examples, below).
  • second messenger systems include, but are not limited to, adenylate cyclase activity, calcium mobilization, ion channel activity, inositol phospholipid hydrolysis, or guanylyl cyclase activity.
  • Heterologous expression systems using appropriate host cells to express the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be used to obtain the desired second messenger coupling. Receptor activity also may be assayed in an oocyte expression system.
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptide variants which are biologically active, i.e., retain the ability to bind galanin or a galanin analog and/or to mediate a biological activity as described above, also are galanin receptor-like polypeptides.
  • naturally or non-naturally occurring galanin receptor-like polypeptide variants have amino acid sequences which are at least about 26, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65 or 70, preferably about 75, 90, 96, 98, or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2. Percent identity between a putative galanin receptor-like polypeptide variant and an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 is determined using the Blast2 alignment program.
  • Variations in percent identity can be due, for example, to amino acid substitutions, insertions, or deletions.
  • Amino acid substitutions are defined as one for one amino acid replacements. They are conservative in nature when the substituted amino acid has similar structural and or chemical properties. Examples of conservative replace- ments are substitution of a leucine with an isoleucine or valine, an aspartate with a glutamate, or a threonine with a serine.
  • Amino acid insertions or deletions are changes to or within an amino acid sequence. They typically fall in the range of about 1 to 5 amino acids.
  • Fusion proteins are useful for generating antibodies against galanin receptor-like amino acid sequences and for use in various assay systems. For example, fusion proteins can be used to identify proteins which interact with portions of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. Protein affinity chromatography or library-based assays for protein-protein interactions, such as the yeast two-hybrid or phage display systems, can be used for this purpose. Such methods are well known in the art and also can be used as drug screens.
  • a galanin receptor-like polypeptide fusion protein comprises two polypeptide segments fused together by means of a peptide bond.
  • the first polypeptide segment can comprise at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, or 400 or more contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2 or of a biologically active variant, such as those described above.
  • the first polypeptide segment also can comprise full-length galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • the second polypeptide segment can be a full-length protein or a protein fragment.
  • Proteins commonly used in fusion protein construction include ⁇ -galactosidase, ⁇ - glucuronidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP), autofluorescent proteins, including blue fluorescent protein (BFP), glutathione-S-transferase (GST), luciferase, horseradish peroxidase (HRP), and chloramphenicol acetylfransferase (CAT).
  • epitope tags are used in fusion protein constructions, including histidine (His) tags, FLAG tags, influenza hemagglutinin (HA) tags, Myc tags, NSN- G tags, and thioredoxin (Trx) tags.
  • Other fusion constructions can include maltose binding protein (MBP), S-tag, Lex a D ⁇ A binding domain (DBD) fusions, GAL4
  • a fusion protein also can be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the galanin receptor-like polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety.
  • a fusion protein can be synthesized chemically, as is known in the art.
  • a fusion protein is produced by covalently linking two polypeptide segments or by standard procedures in the art of molecular biology.
  • Recombinant D ⁇ A methods can be used to prepare fusion proteins, for example, by making a D ⁇ A construct which comprises coding sequences selected from SEQ ID ⁇ O:3 in proper reading frame with nucleotides encoding the second polypeptide segment and expressing the DNA construct in a host cell, as is known in the art.
  • Many kits for constructing fusion proteins are available from companies such as Promega Corporation (Madison, WI), Stratagene (La Jolla, CA), CLONTECH (Mountain View, CA),
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptide polynucleotides (described below) to make suitable probes or primers for screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast, identifying cDNAs which encode homologs of galanin receptor-like polypeptide, and expressing the cDNAs as is known in the art.
  • a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be single- or double-sfranded and comprises a coding sequence or the complement of a coding sequence for a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • a coding sequence for human galanin receptor-like GPCR is shown in SEQ ID NO:3.
  • nucleotide sequences encoding human galanin receptor-like polypeptides as well as homologous nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, preferably about 75, 90, 96, 98, or 99% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:3 also are galanin receptor-like polynucleotides. Percent sequence identity between the sequences of two polynucleotides is determined using computer programs such as ALIGN which employ the FASTA algorithm, using an affine gap search with a gap open penalty of -12 and a gap extension penalty of -2.
  • cDNA Complementary DNA
  • species homologs, and variants of galanin receptor-like polynucleotides which encode biologically active Galanin receptor-like polypeptides also are galanin receptor-like polynucleotides.
  • Polynucleotides comprising at least 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, or 25 contiguous nucleotides of SEQ ID NO:3 or its complement also are galanin receptor-hke polynucleotide polynucleotides.
  • Such polynucleotides can be used, for example, as hybridization probes or antisense oligonucleotides.
  • Variants and homologs of the galanin receptor-like polynucleotides described above also are galanin receptor-like polynucleotides.
  • homologous galanin receptor-like polynucleotide sequences can be identified by hybridization of candidate polynucleotides to known galanin receptor-like polynucleotides under stringent conditions, as is known in the art.
  • homologous sequences can be identified which contain at most about 25-30% basepair mismatches. More preferably, homologous nucleic acid strands contain 15-25% basepair mismatches, even more preferably 5-15% basepair mismatches.
  • Species homologs of the galanin receptor-like polynucleotides disclosed herein also can be identified by making suitable probes or primers and screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast.
  • Human variants of galanin receptor-like polynucleotides can be identified, for example, by screening human cDNA expression libraries. It is well known that the T m of a double-sfranded DNA decreases by 1-1.5°C with every 1% decrease in homology (Bonner et al., J. Mol. Biol. 81, 123 (1973).
  • Variants of human galanin receptor-like polynucleotides or galanin receptor-like polynucleotides of other species can therefore be identified by hybridizing a putative homologous galanin receptor-like polynucleotide with a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3 or the complement thereof to form a test hybrid.
  • the melting temperature of the test hybrid is compared with the melting temperature of a hybrid comprising transformylase polynucleotides having perfectly complementary nucleotide sequences, and the number or percent of basepair mismatches within the test hybrid is calculated.
  • Nucleotide sequences which hybridize to galanin receptor-like polynucleotides or their complements following stringent hybridization and/or wash conditions are also galanin receptor-like polynucleotides.
  • Stringent wash conditions are well known and understood in the art and are disclosed, for example, in Sambrook et al., MOLECULAR CLONING: A LABORATORY MANUAL, 2d ed., 1989, at pages 9.50-9.51.
  • a combination of temperature and salt concentration should be chosen that is approximately 12-20°C below the calculated T m of the hybrid under study.
  • T m of a hybrid between a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:3 or the complement thereof and a polynucleotide sequence which is at least about 50, preferably about 75, 90, 96, or 98% identical to one of those nucleotide sequences can be calculated, for example, using the equation of Bolton and McCarthy, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 48, 1390 (1962):
  • Stringent wash conditions include, for example, 4X SSC at 65°C, or 50% formamide, 4X SSC at 42°C, or 0.5X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65°C.
  • Highly stringent wash conditions include, for example, 0.2X SSC at 65°C.
  • a naturally occurring galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be isolated free of other cellular components such as membrane components, proteins, and lipids.
  • Polynucleotides can be made by a cell and isolated using standard nucleic acid purification techniques, or synthesized using an amplification technique, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or by using an automatic synthesizer. Methods for isolating polynucleotides are routine and are known in the art. Any such technique for obtaining a polynucleotide can be used to obtain isolated galanin receptor-like polynucleotides. For example, restriction enzymes and probes can be used to isolate polynucleotide fragments which comprises galanin receptor-like nucleotide sequences.
  • Isolated polynucleotides are in preparations which are free or at least 70, 80, or 90% free of other molecules.
  • Galanin receptor-like cDNA molecules can be made with standard molecular biology techniques, using galanin receptor-like mRNA as a template. Galanin receptor-like cDNA molecules can thereafter be replicated using molecular biology techniques known in the art and disclosed in manuals such as Sambrook et al. (1989).
  • An amplification technique, such as PCR can be used to obtain additional copies of polynucleotides of the invention, using either human genomic DNA or cDNA as a template.
  • PCR-based methods can be used to extend nucleic acid sequences encoding human galanin receptor-like GPCR to detect upstream sequences such as promoters and regulatory elements.
  • restriction-site PCR uses universal primers to retrieve unknown sequence adjacent to a known locus (Sarkar, PCR Methods Applic.
  • Genomic DNA is first amplified in the presence of a primer to a linker sequence and a primer specific to the known region. The amplified sequences are then subjected to a second round of PCR with the same linker primer and another specific primer internal to the first one. Products of each round of PCR are trans- cribed with an appropriate RNA polymerase and sequenced using reverse transcriptase.
  • Inverse PCR also can be used to amplify or extend sequences using divergent primers based on a known region (Triglia et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 16, 8186, 1988). Primers can be designed using commercially available software, such as OLIGO 4.06 Primer
  • the method uses several restriction enzymes to generate a suitable fragment in the known region of a gene. The fragment is then circularized by intramolecular ligation and used as a PCR template.
  • capture PCR involves PCR amplification of DNA fragments adjacent to a known sequence in human and yeast artificial chromosome DNA (Lagerstrom et al., PCR Methods Applic. 1, 111-119, 1991).
  • multiple restriction enzyme digestions and ligations also can be used to place an engineered double-stranded sequence into an unknown fragment of the DNA molecule before performing PCR.
  • Randomly-primed libraries are preferable, in that they will contain more sequences which contain the 5' regions of genes. Use of a randomly primed library may be especially preferable for situations in which an oligo d(T) library does not yield a full-length cDNA. Genomic libraries can be useful for extension of sequence into 5' non-transcribed regulatory regions.
  • capillary electrophoresis systems can be used to analyze the size or confirm the nucleotide sequence of PCR or sequencing products.
  • capillary sequencing can employ flowable polymers for electrophoretic separation, four different fluorescent dyes (one for each nucleotide) which are laser activated, and detection of the emitted wavelengths by a charge coupled device camera.
  • Output/light intensity can be converted to electrical signal using appropriate software (e.g. GENOTYPER and Sequence NAVIGATOR, Perkin Elmer), and the entire process from loading of samples to computer analysis and elecfronic data display can be computer controlled.
  • Capillary electrophoresis is especially preferable for the sequencing of small pieces of DNA which might be present in limited amounts in a particular sample.
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be obtained, for example, by purification from human cells, by expression of galanin receptor-like polynucleotides, or by direct chemical synthesis.
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be purified from any human cell which expresses the receptor, including those which have been transfected with expression constructs which express galanin receptor-like polypeptides.
  • expression constructs which express galanin receptor-like polypeptides For example, adrenal medulla, uterus, gastrointestinal tract, dorsal root ganglia, sympathetic neurons, hypothalamus, hippocampus, amygdala, basal forebrain, brainstem nuclei, and spinal cord, including cell lines and carcinomas derived from these tissues, are useful sources of galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • a purified galanin receptor-like polypeptide is separated from other compounds which normally associate with the galanin receptor-like polypeptide in the cell, such as certain proteins, carbohydrates, or lipids, using methods well-known in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to, size exclusion chromatography, ammonium sulfate fractionation, ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromoatography, and preparative gel electrophoresis.
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptide is conveniently isolated as a complex with its associated G protein.
  • a variety of galanin analogs are available and can be used as ligands for receptor binding. See the specific examples, below.
  • a preparation of purified galanin receptor-like polypeptides is at least 80% pure; preferably, the preparations are 90%, 95%, or 99% pure. Purity of the preparations can be assessed by any means known in the art, such as SDS-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.
  • a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be inserted into an expression vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence.
  • Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides and appropriate franscriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described, for example, in Sambrook et al. (1989) and in Ausubel et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY,
  • a variety of expression vector/host systems can be utilized to contain and express sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors, insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids), or animal cell systems.
  • microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors
  • yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus,
  • control elements or regulatory sequences are those non-translated regions of the vector — enhancers, promoters, 5' and 3' untranslated regions — which interact with host cellular proteins to carry out transcription and translation. Such elements can vary in their strength and specificity.
  • any number of suitable transcription and translation elements including constitutive and inducible promoters, can be used.
  • inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the BLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, LaJolla, Calif.) or pSPORTl plasmid (Life Technologies) and the like can be used.
  • the baculovirus polyhedrin promoter can be used in insect cells.
  • Promoters or enhancers derived from the genomes of plant cells e.g., heat shock, RUBISCO, and storage protein genes
  • plant viruses e.g., viral promoters or leader sequences
  • promoters from mammalian genes or from mammalian viruses are preferable. If it is necessary to generate a cell line that contains multiple copies of a nucleotide sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, vectors based on SV40 or EBV can be used with an appropriate selectable marker.
  • a number of expression vectors can be selected depending upon the use intended for the galanin receptor-like polypeptide. For example, when a large quantity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide is needed for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified can be used. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUESCRIPT
  • pIN vectors Van Heeke & Schuster, J. Biol. Chem. 264, 5503-5509, 1989
  • pGEX vectors Promega, Madison, Wis.
  • GST glutathione S-transferase
  • fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione.
  • Proteins made in such systems can be designed to include heparin, thrombin, or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned polypeptide of interest can be released from the GST moiety at will.
  • yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae a number of vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH can be used.
  • constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH.
  • sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be driven by any of a number of promoters.
  • viral promoters such as the 35S and 19S promoters of CaMV can be used alone or in combination with the omega leader sequence from TMV (Takamatsu).
  • plant promoters such as the small subunit of RUBISCO or heat shock promoters can be used (Coruzzi et al, EMBO J. 3, 1671-1680, 1984; Broglie et al, Science 224, 838-843, 1984; Winter et al, Results
  • An insect system also can be used to express a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • Autographa califo nica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera frugiperda cells or in Trichoplusia larvae.
  • Sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be cloned into a non-essential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter.
  • Successful insertion of galanin receptor-like polypeptides will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein.
  • the recombinant viruses can then be used to infect S. frugiperda cells or Trichoplusia larvae in which galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be expressed (Engelhard et al, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 91, 3224-3227, 1994).
  • a number of viral-based expression systems can be used to express galanin receptorlike polypeptides in mammalian host cells.
  • sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex comprising the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a non-essential El or E3 region of the viral genome can be used to obtain a viable virus which is capable of expressing a galanin receptor-like polypeptide in infected host cells (Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81, 3655-3659, 1984).
  • transcription enhancers such as the Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) enhancer, can be used to increase expression in mammalian host cells.
  • RSV Rous sarcoma virus
  • HACs Human artificial chromosomes
  • 6M to 10M are constructed and delivered to cells via conventional delivery methods (e.g., liposomes, polycationic amino polymers, or vesicles).
  • Specific initiation signals also can be used to achieve more efficient translation of sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides. Such signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, its initiation codon, and upstream sequences are inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional transcriptional or translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only coding sequence, or a fragment thereof, is inserted, exogenous translational control signals (including the ATG initiation codon) should be provided. The initiation codon should be in the co ⁇ ect reading frame to ensure translation of the entire insert.
  • Exogenous translational elements and initiation codons can be of various origins, both natural and synthetic.
  • the efficiency of expression can be enhanced by the inclusion of enhancers which are appropriate for the particular cell system which is used (see Sc axi et al, Results Probl. Cell Differ. 20, 125-162, 1994).
  • a host cell strain can be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed galanin receptor-like polypeptide in the desired fashion.
  • modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation.
  • Post-translational processing which cleaves a "prepro" form of the polypeptide also can be used to facilitate co ⁇ ect insertion, folding and/or function.
  • Different host cells which have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for post-translational activities (e.g., CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and WI38), are available from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC; 10801
  • Stable expression is prefe ⁇ ed for long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins.
  • cell lines which stably express galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be transformed using expression vectors which can contain viral origins of replication and/or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene on the same or on a separate vector. Following the introduction of the vector, cells can be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched medium before they are switched to a selective medium.
  • the purpose of the selectable marker is to confer resistance to selection, and its presence allows growth and recovery of cells which successfully express the introduced galanin receptor-like sequences.
  • Resistant clones of stably transformed cells can be proliferated using tissue culture techniques appropriate to the cell type. See, for example, ANIMAL CELL CULTURE, R.I. Freshney, ed., 1986. Any number of selection systems can be used to recover transformed cell lines.
  • herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al, Cell 11, 223-32, 1977) and adenine phosphoribosylfransferase (Lowy et al, Cell 22, 817-23, 1980) genes which can be employed in tk ' or aprf cells, respectively.
  • antimetabolite, antibiotic, or herbicide resistance can be used as the basis for selection.
  • dhfr confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • npt confers resistance to the aminoglycosides, neomycin and G-418 (Colbere-Garapin et al, J. Mol. Biol. 150, 1-14, 1981), and als and pat confer resistance to chlorsulfuron and phosphinotricin acetyltransferase, respectively (Murry, 1992, supra). Additional selectable genes have been described. For example, trpB allows cells to utilize indole in place of tryptophan, or hisD, which allows cells to utilize histinol in place of histidine (Hartman & Mulligan, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 85, 8047-51, 1988).
  • Visible markers such as anthocyanins, ⁇ -glucuronidase and its substrate GUS, and luciferase and its subsfrate luciferin, can be used to identify transformants and to quantify the amount of transient or stable protein expression attributable to a specific vector system (Rhodes et al, Methods Mol. Biol. 55, 121-131, 1995).
  • marker gene expression suggests that the galanin receptorlike polynucleotide is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed. For example, if a sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, transformed cells containing sequences which encode a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be identified by the absence of marker gene function. Alternatively, a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the galanin receptor-like polynucleotide.
  • host cells which contain a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide and which express a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. These procedures include, but are not limited to, DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridizations and protein bioassay or immunoassay techniques which include membrane, solution, or chip-based technologies for the detection and/or quantification of nucleic acid or protein. For example, the presence of a polynucleotide sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be detected by DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridization or amplification using probes or fragments or fragments of polynucleotides encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • Nucleic acid amplification-based assays involve the use of oligonucleotides selected from sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide to detect transformants which contain a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide.
  • a variety of protocols for detecting and measuring the expression of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, using either polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies specific for the polypeptide, are known in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immuno- sorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immuno- sorbent assay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • a two-site, monoclonal-based immunoassay using monoclonal antibodies reactive to two non-interfering epitopes on a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be used, or a competitive binding assay can be employed. These and other assays are described in Hampton et al, SEROLOGICAL METHODS: A LABORATORY MANUAL, APS Press, St. Paul, Minn., 1990) and Maddox et al, J. Exp. Med 755,
  • Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling, or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide.
  • sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe.
  • vectors are known in the art, are commercially available, and can be used to synthesize RNA probes in yitro by addition of labeled nucleotides and an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6. These procedures can be conducted using a variety of commercially available kits (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Promega, and US Biochemical).
  • Suitable reporter molecules or labels which can be used for ease of detection include radionuclides, enzymes, and fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents, as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like.
  • Host cells transformed with nucleotide sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture.
  • the polypeptide produced by a transformed cell can be secreted or contained infracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used.
  • expression vectors containing polynucleotides which encode galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of soluble galanin receptor-like polypeptides through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane or which direct the membrane insertion of membrane-bound galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • purification facilitating domains include, but are not limited to, metal chelating peptides such as histidine-tryptophan modules that allow purification on immobilized metals, protein A domains that allow purification on immobilized immunoglobulin, and the domain utilized in the FLAGS extension/affinity purification system (Immunex Corp., Seattle, Wash.).
  • cleavable linker sequences such as those specific for Factor XA or enterokinase (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) between the purification domain and the galanin receptor-like polypeptide also can be used to facilitate purification.
  • One such expression vector provides for expression of a fusion protein containing a galanin receptor-like polypeptide and 6 histidine residues preceding a thioredoxin or an enterokinase cleavage site. The histidine residues facilitate purification by BVIAC (immobilized metal ion affinity chromatography, as described in Porath et al, Prot. Exp. Purif.
  • enterokinase cleavage site provides a means for purifying the galanin receptor-like polypeptide from the fusion protein.
  • Vectors which contain fusion proteins are disclosed in Rroll et al, DNA Cell Biol. 12, 441-453, 1993.
  • Sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see Caruthers et al, Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 215-223, 1980; Horn et al. Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 225-232, 1980).
  • a galanin receptor-like polypeptide itself can be produced using chemical methods to synthesize its amino acid sequence, such as by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149-2154, 1963; Roberge et al, Science 269, 202-204, 1995). Protein synthesis can be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis can be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431 A Peptide Synthesizer
  • fragments of galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be separately synthesized and combined using chemical methods to produce a full- length molecule.
  • the newly synthesized peptide can be substantially purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (e.g., Creighton, PROTEINS: STRUCTURES AND MOLECULAR PRINCIPLES, WH Freeman and Co., New York, N.Y, 1983).
  • the composition of a synthetic galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing (e.g., the Edman degradation procedure; see Creighton, supra). Additionally, any portion of the amino acid sequence of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be altered during direct synthesis and/or combined using chemical methods with sequences from other proteins to produce a variant polypeptide or a fusion protein.
  • codons prefe ⁇ ed by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce an RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence.
  • nucleotide sequences disclosed herein can be engineered using methods generally known in the art to alter galanin receptor-like polypeptide-encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the polypeptide or mRNA product.
  • DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides can be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences.
  • site-directed mutagenesis can be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, introduce mutations, and so forth.
  • Antibody as used herein includes intact immunoglobulin molecules, as well as fragments thereof, such as Fab, F(ab') 2 , and Fv, which are capable of binding an epitope of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • Fab fragment antigen binding protein
  • F(ab') 2 fragment antigen binding protein
  • Fv fragment antigen binding protein
  • epitopes which involve non-contiguous amino acids may require more, e.g., at least 15, 25, or 50 amino acids.
  • An antibody which specifically binds to an epitope of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be used therapeutically, as well as in immunochemical assays, such as Western blots, ELISAs, radioimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art.
  • immunochemical assays such as Western blots, ELISAs, radioimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art.
  • Various immunoassays can be used to identify antibodies having the desired specificity. Numerous protocols for competitive binding or immunoradiometric assays are well known in the art. Such immunoassays typically involve the measurement of complex formation between an immunogen and an antibody which specifically binds to the immunogen.
  • an antibody which specifically binds to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide provides a detection signal at least 5-, 10-, or 20-fold higher than a detection signal provided with other proteins when used in an immunochemical assay.
  • antibodies which specifically bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides do not detect other proteins in immunochemical assays and can immunoprecipitate a galanin receptor-like polypeptide from solution.
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be used to immunize a mammal, such as a mouse, rat, rabbit, guinea pig, monkey, or human, to produce polyclonal antibodies.
  • a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be conjugated to a carrier protein, such as bovine serum albumin, thyroglobulin, and keyhole limpet hemocyanin.
  • a carrier protein such as bovine serum albumin, thyroglobulin, and keyhole limpet hemocyanin.
  • adjuvants can be used to increase the immunological response.
  • adjuvants include, but are not limited to, Freund's adjuvant, mineral gels (e.g., aluminum hydroxide), and surface active substances (e.g.
  • Monoclonal antibodies which specifically bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be prepared using any technique which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These techniques include, but are not limited to, the hybridoma technique, the human B-cell hybridoma technique, and the EBV-hybridoma technique (Kohler et al, Nature 256, 495-497, 1985; Kozbor et al,
  • chimeric antibodies he splicing of mouse antibody genes to human antibody genes to obtain a molecule with appropriate antigen specificity and biological activity
  • techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies” can be used (Morrison et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 81, 6851-6855, 1984; Neuberger et al, Nature 312, 604-608, 1984; Takeda et al, Nature 314, 452-454, 1985).
  • Monoclonal and other antibodies also can be "humanized” to prevent a patient from mounting an immune response against the antibody when it is used therapeutically. Such antibodies may be sufficiently similar in sequence to human antibodies to be used directly in therapy or may require alteration of a few key residues.
  • rodent antibodies and human sequences can be minimized by replacing residues which differ from those in the human sequences by site directed mutagenesis of individual residues or by grating of entire complementarity determining regions.
  • humanized antibodies can be produced using recombinant methods, as described in GB2188638B.
  • Antibodies which specifically bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can contain antigen binding sites which are either partially or fully humanized, as disclosed in U.S. 5,565,332.
  • single chain antibodies can be adapted using methods known in the art to produce single chain antibodies which specifically bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides.
  • Antibodies with related specificity, but of distinct idiotypic composition can be generated by chain shuffling from random combinatorial immunoglobin libraries (Burton, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • S ingle-chain antibodies also can be constructed using a DNA amplification method, such as PCR, using hybridoma cDNA as a template (Thirion et al, 1996, Eur. J. Cancer Prey. 5, 507-11).
  • Single-chain antibodies can be mono- or bispecific, and can be bivalent or tetravalent. Construction of tefravalent, bispecific single-chain antibodies is taught, for example, in Coloma & Morrison, 1997, Nat. Biotechnol. 15, 159-63. Construction of bivalent, bispecific single-chain antibodies is taught in Mallender & Voss, 1994, J Biol. Chem. 269, 199-206.
  • a nucleotide sequence encoding a single-chain antibody can be constructed using manual or automated nucleotide synthesis, cloned into an expression construct using standard recombinant DNA methods, and introduced into a cell to express the coding sequence, as described below.
  • single-chain antibodies can be produced directly using, for example, filamentous phage technology (Verhaar et al, 1995, Int. J. Cancer 61, 497-501; Nicholls et al, 1993, J. Immunol. Meth. 165, 81-
  • Antibodies which specifically bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides also can be produced by inducing in vivo production in the lymphocyte population or by screening immunoglobulin libraries or panels of highly specific binding reagents as disclosed in the literature (Orlandi et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 86, 3833-3837, 1989; Winter et al, Nature 349, 293-299, 1991).
  • chimeric antibodies can be constructed as disclosed in
  • Binding proteins which are derived from immunoglobulins and which are multivalent and multispecific, such as the "diabodies" described in WO 94/13804, also can be prepared.
  • Antibodies according to the invention can be purified by methods well known in the art. For example, antibodies can be affinity purified by passage over a column to which a galanin receptor-like polypeptide is bound. The bound antibodies can then be eluted from the column using a buffer with a high salt concentration.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides are nucleotide sequences which are complementary to a specific DNA or RNA sequence. Once introduced into a cell, the complementary nucleotides combine with natural sequences produced by the cell to form complexes and block either transcription or translation. Preferably, an antisense oligonucleotide is at least 11 nucleotides in length, but can be at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides long. Longer sequences also can be used. Antisense oligonucleotide molecules can be provided in a DNA construct and introduced into a cell as described above to decrease the level of galanin receptor-like GPCR gene products in the cell.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides can be deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides, or a combination of both. Oligonucleotides can be synthesized manually or by an automated synthesizer, by covalently linking the 5' end of one nucleotide with the 3' end of another nucleotide with non-phosphodiester internucleotide linkages such alkylphosphonates, phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, alkylphosphonothioates, alkylphosphonates, phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, carbamates, acetamidate, carboxymethyl esters, carbonates, and phosphate triesters. See Brown, Meth. Mol. Biol. 20, 1-8, 1994; Sonveaux, Meth. Mol. Biol. 26, 1-72, 1994; Uhlmann et al, Chem. Rev. 90, 543-583, 1990.
  • Modifications of galanin receptor-like GPCR gene expression can be obtained by designing antisense oligonucleotides which will form duplexes to the control, 5', or regulatory regions of the galanin receptor-like GPCR gene. Oligonucleotides derived from the transcription initiation site, e.g., between positions -10 and +10 from the start site, are prefe ⁇ ed. Similarly, inhibition can be achieved using "triple helix" base-pairing methodology. Triple helix pairing is useful because it causes inhibition of the ability of the double helix to open sufficiently for the binding of polymerases, transcription factors, or chaperons.
  • An antisense oligonucleotide also can be designed to block translation of mRNA by preventing the transcript from binding to ribosomes.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides which comprise, for example, 2, 3,
  • each stretch of complementary contiguous nucleotides is at least 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 or more nucleotides in length.
  • Non- complementary intervening sequences are preferably 1, 2, 3, or 4 nucleotides in length.
  • One skilled in the art can easily use the calculated melting point of an antisense-sense pair to determine the degree of mismatching which will be tolerated between a particular antisense oligonucleotide and a particular galanin receptor-like polynucleotide sequence.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides can be modified without affecting their ability to hybridize to a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide. These modifications can be internal or at one or both ends of the antisense molecule. For example, inter- nucleoside phosphate linkages can be modified by adding cholesteryl or diamine moieties with varying numbers of carbon residues between the amino groups and terminal ribose.
  • Modified bases and/or sugars such as arabinose instead of ribose, or a 3', 5 '-substituted oligonucleotide in which the 3' hydroxyl group or the 5' phosphate group are substituted, also can be employed in a modified antisense oligonucleotide.
  • modified oligonucleotides can be prepared by methods well known in the art. See, e.g., Agrawal et al, Trends Biotechnol. 10, 152-158, 1992; Uhlmann et al, Chem. Rev. 90, 543-584, 1990; Uhlmann et al, Tetrahedron. Lett. 215, 3539-3542, 1987.
  • Ribozymes are RNA molecules with catalytic activity. See, e.g., Cech, Science 236, 1532-1539; 1987; Cech, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 59, 543-568; 1990, Cech, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 2, 605-609; 1992, Couture & Stinchcomb, Trends Genet. 12, 510-515, 1996. Ribozymes can be used to inhibit gene function by cleaving an RNA sequence, as is known in the art (e.g., Haseloff et al, U.S. Patent 5,641,673).
  • ribozyme action involves sequence-specific hybridization of the ribozyme molecule to complementary target RNA, followed by endonucleolytic cleavage.
  • Examples include engineered hammerhead motif ribozyme molecules that can specifically and efficiently catalyze endonucleolytic cleavage of specific nucleotide sequences.
  • the coding sequence of a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be used to generate ribozymes which will specifically bind to mRNA transcribed from the galanin receptor-like polynucleotide.
  • Methods of designing and constructing ribozymes which can cleave other RNA molecules in trans in a highly sequence specific manner have been developed and described in the art (.see Haseloff et al. Nature 334, 585-591, 1988).
  • the cleavage activity of ribozymes can be targeted to specific RNAs by engineering a discrete "hybridization" region into the ribozyme.
  • the hybridization region contains a sequence complementary to the target
  • RNA and thus specifically hybridizes with the target (see, for example, Gerlach et ⁇ /., EP 321,201).
  • ribozyme cleavage sites within a galanin receptor-like GPCR RNA target can be identified by scanning the target molecule for ribozyme cleavage sites which include the following sequences: GUA, GUU, and GUC. Once identified, short RNA sequences of between 15 and 20 ribonucleotides co ⁇ esponding to the region of the target RNA containing the cleavage site can be evaluated for secondary structural features which may render the target inoperable. Suitability of candidate galanin receptor-like GPCR RNA targets also can be evaluated by testing accessibility to hybridization with complementary oligonucleotides using ribonuclease protection assays.
  • nucleotide sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:3 and its complement provide sources of suitable hybridization region sequences. Longer complementary sequences can be used to increase the affinity of the hybridization sequence for the target.
  • the hybridizing and cleavage regions of the ribozyme can be integrally related such that upon hybridizing to the target RNA through the complementary regions, the catalytic region of the ribozyme can cleave the target.
  • Ribozymes can be introduced into cells as part of a DNA construct. Mechanical methods, such as microinjection, liposome-mediated transfection, electroporation, or calcium phosphate precipitation, can be used to introduce a ribozyme-containing DNA construct.
  • a ribozyme-encoding DNA construct can include transcriptional regulatory elements, such as a promoter element, an enhancer or UAS element, and a transcriptional terminator signal, for controlling transcription of ribozymes in the cells.
  • ribozymes can be engineered so that ribozyme expression will occur in response to factors which induce expression of a target gene. Ribozymes also can be engineered to provide an additional level of regulation, so that destruction of mRNA occurs only when both a ribozyme and a target gene are induced in the cells. Differentially Expressed Genes
  • genes whose products interact with human galanin receptor-like GPCR may represent genes that are differentially expressed in disorders including, but not limited to, diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular disease, and neurological diseases. Further, such genes may represent genes that are differentially regulated in response to manipulations relevant to the progression or treatment of such diseases. Additionally, such genes may have a temporally modulated expression, increased or decreased at different stages of tissue or organism development. A differentially expressed gene may also have its expression modulated under control versus experimental conditions. In addition, the galanin receptor-like GPCR gene or gene product may itself be tested for differential expression.
  • the degree to which expression differs in a normal versus a diseased state need only be large enough to be visualized via standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques.
  • standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques.
  • Other such standard characterization techniques by which expression differences may be visualized include but are not limited to, quantitative RT (reverse transcriptase), PCR, and Northern analysis.
  • RNA or, preferably, mRNA is isolated from tissues of interest.
  • RNA samples are obtained from tissues of experimental subjects and from co ⁇ esponding tissues of control subjects.
  • RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA may be utilized for the purification of such RNA samples. See, for example, Ausubel et al, ed., CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, 1987-1993. Large numbers of tissue samples may readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski, U.S. Patent 4,843,155. Transcripts within the collected RNA samples that represent RNA produced by differentially expressed genes are identified by methods well known to those of skill in the art. They include, for example, differential screening (Tedder et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85, 208-12, 1988), subfractive hybridization (Hedrick et al,
  • the differential expression information may itself suggest relevant methods for the treatment of disorders involving the human galanin receptor-like GPCR.
  • treatment may include a modulation of expression of the differentially expressed genes and or the gene encoding the human somatostatin receptor-like protein.
  • the differential expression information may indicate whether the expression or activity of the differentially expressed gene or gene product or the human somatostatin receptor-like protein gene or gene product are up-regulated or down- regulated.
  • the invention provides methods for identifying modulators, i.e., candidate or test compounds which bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides or polynucleotides and/or have a stimulatory or inhibitory effect on, for example, expression or activity of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide or polynucleotide, so as to increase or decrease signal transduction mediated by the receptor.
  • modulators i.e., candidate or test compounds which bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides or polynucleotides and/or have a stimulatory or inhibitory effect on, for example, expression or activity of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide or polynucleotide, so as to increase or decrease signal transduction mediated by the receptor.
  • the invention provides assays for screening test compounds which bind to or modulate the activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide.
  • a test compound preferably binds to a galanin receptor-like poly- peptide or polynucleotide. More preferably, a test compound decreases or increases a galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or expression of a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% relative to the absence of the test compound.
  • Test compounds can be pharmacologic agents already known in the art or can be compounds previously unknown to have any pharmacological activity.
  • the compounds can be naturally occurring or designed in the laboratory. They can be isolated from microorganisms, animals, or plants, and can be produced recombinantly, or synthesized by chemical methods known in the art. If desired, test compounds can be obtained using any of the numerous combinatorial library methods known in the art, including but not limited to, biological libraries, spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries, synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution, the "one-bead one-compound” library method, and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection.
  • the biological library approach is limited to polypeptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to polypeptide, non-peptide oligomer, or small molecule libraries of compounds. See Lam, Anticancer Drug Des. 12, 145, 1997.
  • Test compounds can be screened for the ability to bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides or polynucleotides or to affect galanin receptor-like GPCR activity or galanin receptor-like GPCR gene expression using high throughput screening.
  • high throughput screening many discrete compounds can be tested in parallel so that large numbers of test compounds can be quickly screened.
  • the most widely established techniques utilize 96-well microtiter plates. The wells of the microtiter plates typically require assay volumes that range from 50 to 500 ⁇ l.
  • many instruments, materials, pipettors, robotics, plate washers, and plate readers are commercially available to fit the 96-well format.
  • free format assays or assays that have no physical barrier between samples, can be used.
  • an assay using pigment cells (melanocytes) in a simple homogeneous assay for combinatorial peptide libraries is described by Jayawickreme et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 19, 1614-18 (1994).
  • the cells are placed under agarose in petri dishes, then beads that carry combinatorial compounds are placed on the surface of the agarose.
  • the combinatorial compounds are partially released the compounds from the beads. Active compounds can be visualized as dark pigment areas because, as the compounds diffuse locally into the gel matrix, the active compounds cause the cells to change colors.
  • Chelsky "Strategies for Screening Combinatorial Libraries: Novel and Traditional Approaches," reported at the First Annual Conference of The Society for Biomolecular Screening in Philadephia, Pa. (Nov. 7-10, 1995).
  • Chelsky placed a simple homogenous enzyme assay for carbonic anhydrase inside an agarose gel such that the enzyme in the gel would cause a color change throughout the gel.
  • beads carrying com- binatorial compounds via a photolinker were placed inside the gel and the compounds were partially released by UV-light. Compounds that inhibited the enzyme were observed as local zones of inhibition having less color change.
  • test samples are placed in a porous matrix.
  • One or more assay components are then placed within, on top of, or at the bottom of a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support.
  • a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support.
  • the test compound is preferably a small molecule which binds to and occupies the active site of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide, thereby making the ligand binding site inaccessible to substrate such that normal biological activity is prevented.
  • small molecules include, but are not limited to, small peptides or peptide-like molecules.
  • Potential ligands which bind to a polypeptide of the invention include, but are not limited to, the natural ligands of known galanin receptor-like GPCRs and analogues or derivatives thereof.
  • either the test compound or the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can comprise a detectable label, such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase.
  • a detectable label such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase.
  • Detection of a test compound which is bound to the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can then be accomplished, for example, by direct counting of radioemmission, by scintillation counting, or by determining conversion of an appropriate substrate to a detectable product.
  • binding of a test compound to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be determined without labeling either of the interactants.
  • a micro- physiometer can be used to detect binding of a test compound with a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • a microphysiometer e.g., CytosensorTM
  • LAPS light-addressable potentiometric sensor
  • Determining the ability of a test compound to bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide also can be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Bimolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (Sjolander & Urbaniczky, Anal. Chem. 63,
  • BIA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcoreTM). Changes in the optical phenomenon surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
  • SPR surface plasmon resonance
  • a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be used as a "bait protein" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,283,317; Zervos et al, Cell 72, 223-232, 1993; Madura et al, J. Biol. Chem. 268, 12046-12054, 1993; Bartel et al, Biotechniques 14, 920-924, 1993; Iwabuchi et al,
  • the two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains.
  • the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs.
  • polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g. , GAL-4).
  • a DNA sequence that encodes an unidentified protein (“prey" or "sample” can be fused to a polynucleotide that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor.
  • the DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ), which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor.
  • a reporter gene e.g., LacZ
  • Expression of the reporter gene can be detected, and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the DNA sequence encoding the protein which interacts with the galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • either the galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound can be bound to a solid support.
  • Suitable solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass or plastic slides, tissue culture plates, microtiter wells, tubes, silicon chips, or particles such as beads (including, but not limited to, latex, polystyrene, or glass beads).
  • any method known in the art can be used to attach the galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound to a solid support, including use of covalent and non-covalent linkages, passive absorption, or pairs of binding moieties attached respectively to the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound and the solid support.
  • Test compounds are preferably bound to the solid support in an a ⁇ ay, so that the location of individual test compounds can be tracked. Binding of a test compound to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants. Examples of such vessels include microtiter plates, test tubes, and microcentrifuge tubes.
  • the galanin receptor-like polypeptide is a fusion protein comprising a domain that allows the galanin receptor-like polypeptide to be bound to a solid support.
  • glutathione-S-transferase fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtiter plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and the non-adsorbed galanin receptor-like polypeptide; the mixture is then incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads or microtiter plate wells are washed to remove any unbound components.
  • Binding of the interactants can be determined either directly or indirectly, as described above.
  • the complexes can be dissociated from the solid support before binding is determined.
  • a galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or a test compound can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin.
  • Biotinylated galanin receptor-like polypeptides (or polynucleotides) or test compounds can be prepared from biotin-NHS(N-hydroxysuccinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, 111.) and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical).
  • antibodies which specifically bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, polynucleotide, or a test compound, but which do not interfere with a desired binding site, such as the active site of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide, can be derivatized to the wells of the plate. Unbound target or protein can be trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation.
  • GST-immobilized complexes include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies which specifically bind to the galanin receptor-like polypeptide or test compound, enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an activity of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide, and SDS gel electrophoresis under non-reducing conditions.
  • Any cell which comprises a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system.
  • a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Binding of the test compound to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or polynucleotide is determined as described above.
  • Test compounds can be tested for the ability to increase or decrease a galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • Galanin receptorlike GPCR activity can be measured, for example, using methods described in the specific examples, below.
  • Galanin receptor-like GPCR activity can be measured after contacting either a purified galanin receptor-like polypeptide, a cell membrane preparation, or an intact cell with a test compound.
  • test compound 50 more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential agent for decreasing galanin receptor-like GPCR activity.
  • Such a screening procedure involves the use of melanophores which are transfected to express a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • a screening technique is described in PCT WO 92/01810 published Feb. 6, 1992.
  • an assay may be employed for screening for a compound which inhibits activation of the receptor polypeptide of the present invention by contacting the melanophore cells which encode the receptor with both the receptor ligand and a compound to be screened. Inhibition of the signal generated by the ligand indicates that a compound is a potential antagonist for the receptor, i.e., inhibits activation of the receptor.
  • the screen may be employed for identifying a compound which activates the receptor by contacting such cells with compounds to be screened and determining whether each compound generates a signal, i.e., activates the receptor.
  • compounds may be contacted with a cell which expresses the receptor polypeptide of the present invention and a second messenger response, e.g., signal fransduction or pH changes, can be measured to determine whether the potential compound activates or inhibits the receptor.
  • a second messenger response e.g., signal fransduction or pH changes
  • Another such screening technique involves introducing RNA encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide into Xenopus oocytes to transiently express the receptor.
  • the receptor oocytes can then be contacted with the receptor ligand and a compound to be screened, followed by detection of inhibition or activation of a calcium signal in the case of screening for compounds which are thought to inhibit activation of the receptor.
  • Another screening technique involves expressing a galanin receptor-like polypeptide in cells in which the receptor is linked to a phospholipase C or D.
  • Such cells include endothelial cells, smooth muscle cells, embryonic kidney cells, etc.
  • the screening may be accomplished as described above by quantifying the degree of activation of the receptor from changes in the phospholipase activity.
  • test compounds which increase or decrease galanin receptorlike GPCR gene expression are identified.
  • a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide is contacted with a test compound, and the expression of an RNA or polypeptide product of the galanin receptor-like polynucleotide is determined.
  • the level of expression of appropriate mRNA or polypeptide in the presence of the test compound is compared to the level of expression of mRNA or polypeptide in the absence of the test compound.
  • the test compound can then be identified as a modulator of expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of mRNA or polypeptide is greater in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as a stimulator or enhancer of the mRNA or polypeptide expression. Alternatively, when expression of the mRNA or polypeptide is less in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of the mRNA or polypeptide expression.
  • the level of galanin receptor-like GPCR mRNA or polypeptide expression in the cells can be determined by methods well known in the art for detecting mRNA or polypeptide. Either qualitative or quantitative methods can be used.
  • the presence of polypeptide products of a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be determined, for example, using a variety of techniques known in the art, including immunochemical methods such as radioimmunoassay, Western blotting, and immunohistochemistry.
  • polypeptide synthesis can be determined in vivo, in a cell culture, or in an in vitro translation system by detecting incorporation of labeled amino acids into a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • Such screening can be carried out either in a cell-free assay system or in an intact cell.
  • Any cell which expresses a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system.
  • the galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Either a primary culture or an established cell line can be used.
  • compositions of the invention can comprise, for example, a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, galanin receptor-like polynucleotide, antibodies which specifically bind to a galanin receptorlike polypeptide, or mimetics, agonists, antagonists, or inhibitors of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide activity.
  • the compositions can be administered alone or in combination with at least one other agent, such as stabilizing compound, which can be administered in any sterile, biocompatible phannaceutical carrier, including, but not limited to, saline, buffered saline, dextrose, and water.
  • the compositions can be administered to a patient alone, or in combination with other agents, drugs or hormones.
  • compositions of the invention can be administered by any number of routes including, but not limited to, oral, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, inframedullary, infrathecal, infraventricular, transdermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, parenteral, topical, sublingual, or rectal means.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration can be formulated using pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art in dosages suitable for oral administration. Such carriers enable the pharmaceutical compositions to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, and the like, for ingestion by the patient.
  • compositions for oral use can be obtained through combination of active compounds with solid excipient, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores.
  • Suitable excipients are carbohydrate or protein fillers, such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose, such as methyl cellulose, hydroxy- propylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; gums including arabic and fragacanth; and proteins such as gelatin and collagen.
  • disintegrating or solubilizing agents can be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl py ⁇ olidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores can be used in conjunction with suitable coatings, such as concenfrated sugar solutions, which also can contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpy ⁇ olidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • suitable coatings such as concenfrated sugar solutions, which also can contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpy ⁇ olidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for product identification or to characterize the quantity of active compound, i.e., dosage.
  • Push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a coating, such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • Push-fit capsules can contain active ingredients mixed with a filler or binders, such as lactose or starches, lubricants, such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers.
  • the active compounds can be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid, or liquid polyethylene glycol with or without stabilizers.
  • compositions suitable for parenteral administration can be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiologically buffered saline.
  • Aqueous injection suspensions can contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran.
  • suspensions of the active compounds can be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions.
  • Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes.
  • Non-lipid polycationic amino polymers also can be used for delivery.
  • the suspension also can contain suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concenfrated solutions.
  • suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concenfrated solutions.
  • penetrants appropriate to the particular barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
  • compositions of the present invention can be manufactured in a manner that is known in the art, e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping, or lyophilizing processes.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be provided as a salt and can be formed with many acids, including but not limited to, hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the co ⁇ esponding free base forms.
  • the prefened preparation can be a lyophilized powder which can contain any or all of the following: 1-50 mM histidine, 0.1%-2% sucrose, and 2-7% mannitol, at a pH range of 4.5 to 5.5, that is combined with buffer prior to use.
  • compositions can be placed in an appropriate container and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition.
  • labeling would include amount, frequency, and method of administration.
  • G-protein coupled receptors are ubiquitous in the mammalian host and are responsible for many biological functions, including many pathologies. Accordingly, it is desirable to find compounds and drugs which stimulate a G-protein coupled receptor on the one hand and which can inhibit the function of a G-protein coupled receptor on the other hand.
  • compounds which activate the G-protein coupled receptor may be employed for therapeutic purposes, such as the freatment of asthma, Parkinson's disease, acute heart failure, urinary retention, and osteoporosis.
  • compounds which activate the receptors of the present invention are useful in treating various cardiovascular ailments such as caused by the lack of pulmonary blood flow or hypertension.
  • these compounds may also be used in treating various physiological disorders relating to abnormal control of fluid and electrolyte homeostasis and in diseases associated with abnormal angiotensin-induced aldosterone secretion.
  • compounds which inhibit activation of the G-protein coupled receptor may be employed for a variety of therapeutic purposes, for example, for the treatment of hypotension and/or hypertension, angina pectoris, myocardial infarction, ulcers, asthma, allergies, benign prostatic hypertrophy, and psychotic and neurological disorders including schizophrenia, manic excitement, depression, delirium, dementia or severe mental retardation, dyskinesias, such as Huntington's disease or Gilles de la Tourett's syndrome, among others.
  • Compounds which inhibit G-protein coupled receptors have also been useful in reversing endogenous anorexia and in the control ofbulimia.
  • Galanin receptor-like GPCRs provide therapeutic targets for treating and diagnosing various diseases and abnormalities connected with these receptors.
  • Galanin is co-released with norepinephrine from sympathetic nerve terminals, which suggests that galanin could act via galanin receptors in the periphery to modulate nearly every physiological process controlled by sympathetic innervation.
  • Additional therapeutic indications include diabetes, hypertension, cardiovascular disorders, regulation of growth hormone release, regulation of fertility, gastric ulcers, gastrointestinal motility/transit/abso tion/secretion, glaucoma, inflammation, immune disorders, respiratory disorders (e.g. asthma, emphysema).
  • Galanin may also play a role in mediating effects on cognition, analgesia, neuroendocrine regulation, control of insulin release, and control of feeding behavior.
  • Galanin receptor agonists may be useful as analgesic agents in the spinal cord.
  • a galanin antagonist may be effective in ameliorating the symptoms of Alzheimer's disease.
  • Feeding behavior can be modified by administering to a mammal, preferably a human, an amount of a compound which is a galanin receptor-like GPCR agonist or antagonist effective to increase or decrease the consumption of food so as to thereby modify feeding behavior.
  • the compound is a galanin receptorlike GPCR antagonist and the amount is effective to decrease the consumption of food by the subject.
  • the compound is administered in combination with food.
  • the compound is a galanin receptorlike GPCR agonist and the amount is effective to increase the consumption of food by the subject.
  • the compound is administered in combination with food.
  • an antagonist of the human galanin receptor-like GPCR can be administered to a mammal, including a human, to treat obesity or bulimia.
  • An agonist of the human galanin receptor-like GPCR can be administered to treat anorexia.
  • Obesity and overweight are defined as an excess of body fat relative to lean body mass. An increase in caloric intake or a decrease in energy expenditure or both can bring about this imbalance leading to surplus energy being stored as fat. Obesity is associated with important medical morbidities and an increase in mortality. The causes of obesity are poorly understood and may be due to genetic factors, environmental factors or a combination of the two to cause a positive energy balance. In contrast, anorexia and cachexia are characterized by an imbalance in energy intake versus energy expenditure leading to a negative energy balance and weight loss. Agents that either increase energy expenditure and/or decrease energy intake, absorption or storage would be useful for treating obesity, overweight, and associated comorbidities. Agents that either increase energy intake and/or decrease energy expenditure or increase the amount of lean tissue would be useful for treating cachexia, anorexia and wasting disorders.
  • This gene, translated proteins and agents which modulate this gene or portions of the gene or its products are useful for treating obesity, overweight, anorexia, cachexia, wasting disorders, appetite suppression, appetite enhancement, increases or decreases in satiety, modulation of body weight, and/or other eating disorders such as bulimia.
  • this gene translated proteins and agents which modulate this gene or portions of the gene or its products are useful for treating obesity/overweight-associated comor- bidities including hypertension; type 2 diabetes; coronary artery disease; hyper- lipidemia; stroke; gallbladder disease; gout; osteoarthritis; sleep apnea and respiratory problems; some types of cancer including endometrial, breast, prostate and colon; thrombolic disease; polycystic ovarian syndrome; reduced fertility; complications of pregnancy; menstrual i ⁇ egularities; hirsutism; stress incontinence and depression.
  • obesity/overweight-associated comor- bidities including hypertension; type 2 diabetes; coronary artery disease; hyper- lipidemia; stroke; gallbladder disease; gout; osteoarthritis; sleep apnea and respiratory problems; some types of cancer including endometrial, breast, prostate and colon; thrombolic disease; polycystic ovarian syndrome; reduced fertility; complications of pregnancy; menstrual
  • Diabetes mellitus is a common metabolic disorder characterized by an abnormal elevation in blood glucose, alterations in lipids and abnormalities (complications) in the cardiovascular system, eye, kidney and nervous system. Diabetes is divided into two separate diseases: type 1 diabetes (juvenile onset), which results from a loss of cells which make and secrete insulin, and type 2 diabetes (adult onset), which is caused by a defect in insulin secretion and a defect in insulin action.
  • Type 1 diabetes is initiated by an autoimuune reaction that attacks the insulin secreting cells (beta cells) in the pancreatic islets. Agents that prevent this reaction from occurring or that stop the reaction before destruction of the beta cells has been accomplished are potential therapies for this disease. Other agents that induce beta cell proliferation and regeneration also are potential therapies.
  • Type II diabetes is the most common of the two diabetic conditions (6% of the population). The defect in insulin secretion is an important cause of the diabetic condition and results from an inability of the beta cell to properly detect and respond to rises in blood glucose levels with insulin release. Therapies that increase the response by the beta cell to glucose would offer an important new freatment for this disease.
  • the defect in insulin action in Type II diabetic subjects is another target for therapeutic intervention.
  • Agents that increase the activity of the insulin receptor in muscle, liver, and fat will cause a decrease in blood glucose and a normalization of plasma lipids.
  • the receptor activity can be increased by agents that directly stimulate the receptor or that increase the infracellular signals from the receptor.
  • Other therapies can directly activate the cellular end process, i.e. glucose transport or various enzyme systems, to generate an insulin-like effect and therefore a produce beneficial outcome. Because overweight subjects have a greater susceptibility to
  • Type II diabetes any agent that reduces body weight is a possible therapy.
  • Type I and Type diabetes can be treated with agents that mimic insulin action or that treat diabetic complications by reducing blood glucose levels.
  • agents that reduces new blood vessel growth can be used to treat the eye complications that develop in both diseases.
  • CNS disorders which may be treated include brain injuries, cerebrovascular diseases and their consequences, Parkinson's disease, corticobasal degeneration, motor neuron disease, dementia, including ALS, multiple sclerosis, traumatic brain injury, stroke, post-stroke, post-traumatic brain injury, and small-vessel cerebrovascular disease.
  • Dementias such as Alzheimer's disease, vascular dementia, dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia and Parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17, frontotemporal dementias, including Pick's disease, progressive nuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration, Huntington's disease, thalamic degeneration, Creutzfeld-
  • Jakob dementia, HIV dementia, schizophrenia with dementia, and Korsakoffs psychosis also can be treated.
  • freat cognitive-related disorders such as mild cognitive impairment, age-associated memory impairment, age-related cognitive decline, vascular cognitive impairment, attention deficit disorders, attention deficit hyperactivity disorders, and memory disturbances in children with learning disabilities, by regulating the activity of human galanin receptor-like GPCR
  • Pain that is associated with CNS disorders also can be treated by regulating the activity of human galanin receptor-like GPCR Pain which can be treated includes that assoGiftted with central nervous system disorders, such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemo ⁇ hage, vascular malformation).
  • central nervous system disorders such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemo ⁇ hage, vascular malformation).
  • Non-central neuropathic pain includes that associated with post mastectomy pain, reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD), trigeminal neuralgiaradioculopathy, post-surgical pain, HIV/AIDS related pain, cancer pain, metabolic neuropathies (e.g., diabetic neuropathy, vasculitic neuropathy secondary to connective tissue disease), paraneoplastic polyneuropathy associated, for example, with carcinoma of lung, or leukemia, or lymphoma, or carcinoma of prostate, colon or stomach, trigeminal neuralgia, cranial neuralgias, and post-herpetic neuralgia. Pain associated with cancer and cancer treatment also can be treated, as can headache pain (for example, migraine with aura, migraine without aura, and other migraine disorders), episodic and chronic tension-type headache, tension-type like headache, cluster headache, and chronic paroxysmal hemicrania.
  • headache pain for example, migraine with aura, migraine without aura, and other migraine disorders
  • episodic and chronic tension-type headache tension-type like headache, cluster headache, and chronic par
  • Cardiovascular diseases include the following disorders of the heart and the vascular system: congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, ischemic diseases of the heart, all kinds of atrial and ventricular a ⁇ hythmias, hypertensive vascular diseases, and peripheral vascular diseases.
  • Heart failure is defined as a pathophysiologic state in which an abnormality of cardiac function is responsible for the failure of the heart to pump blood at a rate commensurate with the requirement of the metabolizing tissue. It includes all forms of pumping failure, such as high-output and low-output, acute and chronic, right-sided or left-sided, systolic or diastolic, independent of the underlying cause.
  • MI Myocardial infarction
  • Ischemic diseases are conditions in which the coronary flow is restricted resulting in a perfusion which is inadequate to meet the myocardial requirement for oxygen.
  • This group of diseases includes stable angina, unstable angina, and asymptomatic ischemia.
  • Anhythmias include all forms of atrial and ventricular tachya ⁇ hythmias (atrial tachycardia, atrial flutter, atrial fibrillation, atrio-ventricular reentrant tachycardia, preexcitation syndrome, ventricular tachycardia, ventricular flutter, and ventricular fibrillation), as well as bradycardic forms of anhythmias.
  • vascular diseases include primary as well as all kinds of secondary arterial hypertension (renal, endocrine, neurogenic, others).
  • the disclosed gene and its product may be used as drug targets for the treatment of hypertension as well as for the prevention of all complications.
  • Peripheral vascular diseases are defined as vascular diseases in which arterial and/or venous flow is reduced resulting in an imbalance between blood supply and tissue oxygen demand. It includes chronic peripheral arterial occlusive disease (PAOD), acute arterial thrombosis and embolism, inflammatory vascular disorders, Raynaud's phenomenon, and venous disorders. Allergy is a complex process in which environmental antigens induce clinically adverse reactions.
  • PAOD peripheral arterial occlusive disease
  • Allergy is a complex process in which environmental antigens induce clinically adverse reactions.
  • allergens typically elicit a specific IgE response and, although in most cases the allergens themselves have little or no intrinsic toxicity, they induce pathology when the IgE response in turn elicits an IgE-dependent or T cell-dependent hypersensitivity reaction.
  • Hypersensitivity reactions can be local or systemic and typically occur within minutes of allergen exposure in individuals who have previously been sensitized to an allergen.
  • the hypersensitivity reaction of allergy develops when the allergen is recognized by IgE antibodies bound to specific receptors on the surface of effector cells, such as mast cells, basophils, or eosinophils, which causes the activation of the effector cells and the release of mediators that produce the acute signs and symptoms of the reactions.
  • Allergic diseases include asthma, allergic rhinitis (hay fever), atopic dermatitis, and anaphylaxis.
  • Asthma is though to arise as a result of interactions between multiple genetic and environmental factors and is characterized by three major features: 1) intermittent and reversible airway obstruction caused by bronchoconstriction, increased mucus production, and thickening of the walls of the airways that leads to a na ⁇ owing of the airways, 2) airway hype ⁇ esponsiveness caused by a decreased control of airway caliber, and 3) airway inflammation.
  • Certain cells are critical to the inflammatory reaction of asthma and they include T cells and antigen presenting cells, B cells that produce IgE, and mast cells, basophils, eosinophils, and other cells that bind IgE.
  • effector cells accumulate at the site of allergic reaction in the airways and release toxic products that contribute to the acute pathology and eventually to the tissue destruction related to the disorder.
  • Other resident cells such as smooth muscle cells, lung epithelial cells, mucus-producing cells, and nerve cells may also be abnormal in individuals with asthma and may contribute to the pathology. While the airway obstruction of asthma, presenting clinically as an intermittent wheeze and shortness of breath, is generally the most pressing symptom of the disease requiring immediate treatment, the inflammation and tissue destruction associated with the disease can lead to ineversible changes that eventually make asthma a chronic disabling disorder requiring long-term management.
  • Glycophorin A Cho and Sharom. Cell. Immunol 145, 223-39, 1992
  • cyclosporin Alexander et al, Lancet 339, 324-28, 1992
  • a nonapeptide fragment of IL-2 Zav'yalov et al, Immunol. Lett. 31, 285-88, 1992
  • cyclosporin is used as a immuno- suppressant after organ transplantation.
  • This invention further pertains to the use of novel agents identified by the screening assays described above. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to use a test compound identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model.
  • an agent identified as described herein e.g., a modulating agent, an antisense nucleic acid molecule, a specific antibody, ribozyme, or a protein-binding partner
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent.
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent.
  • this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
  • a reagent which affects galanin receptor-like GPCR activity can be administered to a human cell, either in vitro or in vivo, to reduce galanin receptor-like GPCR activity.
  • the reagent preferably binds to an expression product of a human galanin receptorlike GPCR gene. If the expression product is a protein, the reagent is preferably an antibody.
  • an antibody can be added to a preparation of stem cells which have been removed from the body. The cells can then be replaced in the same or another human body, with or without clonal propagation, as is known in the art.
  • the reagent is delivered using a liposome.
  • the liposome is stable in the animal into which it has been administered for at least about
  • a liposome comprises a lipid composition that is capable of targeting a reagent, particularly a polynucleotide, to a particular site in an animal, such as a human.
  • the lipid composition of the liposome is capable of targeting to a specific organ of an animal, such as the lung, liver, spleen, heart brain, lymph nodes, and skin.
  • a liposome useful in the present invention comprises a lipid composition that is capable of fusing with the plasma membrane of the targeted cell to deliver its contents to the cell.
  • the fransfection efficiency of a liposome is about 0.5 ⁇ g of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 10 6 cells, more preferably about 1.0 ⁇ g of DNA per 16 nmol of liposome delivered to about 10 6 cells, and even more preferably about 2.0 ⁇ g of DNA per 16 nmol of liposome delivered to about 10 cells.
  • a liposome is between about 100 and 500 nm, more preferably between about 150 and 450 nm, and even more preferably between about 200 and
  • Suitable liposomes for use in the present invention include those liposomes standardly used in, for example, gene delivery methods known to those of skill in the art. More prefe ⁇ ed liposomes include liposomes having a polycationic lipid composition and/or liposomes having a cholesterol backbone conjugated to polyethylene glycol.
  • a liposome comprises a compound capable of targeting the liposome to a tumor cell, such as a tumor cell ligand exposed on the outer surface of the liposome.
  • Complexing a liposome with a reagent such as an antisense oligonucleotide or ribozyme can be achieved using methods which are standard in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent 5,705,151).
  • polynucleotide is combined with about 8 nmol of liposomes, more preferably from about 0.5 ⁇ g to about 5 ⁇ g of polynucleotides are combined with about 8 nmol liposomes, and even more preferably about 1.0 ⁇ g of polynucleotides is combined with about 8 nmol liposomes.
  • antibodies can be delivered to specific tissues in vivo using receptor-mediated targeted delivery.
  • Receptor-mediated DNA delivery techniques are taught in, for example, Findeis et al. Trends in Biotechnol 11, 202-05 (1993);
  • a therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of active ingredient which increases or decreases galanin receptor-like GPCR activity relative to the galanin receptor-like GPCR activity which occurs in the absence of the therapeutically effective dose.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially either in cell culture assays or in animal models, usually mice, rabbits, dogs, or pigs.
  • the animal model also can be used to determine the appropriate concentration range and route of administration. Such information can then be used to determine useful doses and routes for administration in humans.
  • Therapeutic efficacy and toxicity e.g., ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population) and LD 50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population), can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals.
  • the dose ratio of toxic to therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index, and it can be expressed as the ratio, LD 5 o/ED 5 o.
  • compositions which exhibit large therapeutic indices are prefe ⁇ ed.
  • the data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies is used in formulating a range of dosage for human use.
  • the dosage contained in such compositions is preferably within a range of circulating concenfrations that include the ED 50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage varies within this range depending upon the dosage form employed, sensitivity of the patient, and the route of administration.
  • Dosage and administration are adjusted to provide sufficient levels of the active ingredient or to maintain the desired effect.
  • Factors which can be taken into account include the severity of the disease state, general health of the subject, age, weight, and gender of the subject, diet, time and frequency of administration, drug combination(s), reaction sensitivities, and tolerance/response to therapy.
  • Long-acting pharmaceutical compositions can be administered every 3 to 4 days, every week, or once every two weeks depending on the half-life and clearance rate of the particular formulation.
  • Normal dosage amounts can vary from 0.1 to 100,000 micrograms, up to a total dose of about 1 g, depending upon the route of administration.
  • Guidance as to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the literature and generally available to practitioners in the art. Those skilled in the art will employ different formulations for nucleotides than for proteins or their inhibitors. Similarly, delivery of polynucleotides or polypeptides will be specific to particular cells, conditions, locations, etc.
  • polynucleotides encoding the antibody can be constructed and introduced into a cell either ex vivo or in vivo using well- established techniques including, but not limited to, fransferrin-polycation-mediated DNA transfer, transfection with naked or encapsulated nucleic acids, liposome- mediated cellular fusion, intracellular transportation of DNA-coated latex beads, protoplast fusion, viral infection, elecfroporation, "gene gun,” and DEAE- or calcium phosphate-mediated transfection.
  • Effective in vivo dosages of an antibody are in the range of about 5 ⁇ g to about 50 ⁇ g kg, about 50 ⁇ g to about 5 mg/kg, about 100 ⁇ g to about 500 ⁇ g/kg of patient body weight, and about 200 to about 250 ⁇ g/kg of patient body weight.
  • effective in vivo dosages are in the range of about 100 ng to about 200 ng, 500 ng to about 50 mg, about 1 ⁇ g to about 2 mg, about 5 ⁇ g to about 500 ⁇ g, and about 20 ⁇ g to about 100 ⁇ g ofDNA.
  • the reagent is preferably an antisense oligonucleotide or a ribozyme.
  • Polynucleotides which express antisense oligonucleotides or ribozymes can be introduced into cells by a variety of methods, as described above.
  • a reagent reduces expression of a galanin receptor-like GPCR gene or the activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100%o relative to the absence of the reagent.
  • the effectiveness of the mechanism chosen to decrease the level of expression of a galanin receptor-like GPCR gene or the activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be assessed using methods well known in the art, such as hybridization of nucleotide probes to galanin receptor-like GPCR-specific mRNA, quantitative RT- PCR, immunologic detection of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, or measurement of galanin receptor-like GPCR activity.
  • any of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered in combination with other appropriate therapeutic agents.
  • Selection of the appropriate agents for use in combination therapy can be made by one of ordinary skill in the art, according to conventional pharmaceutical principles.
  • the combination of therapeutic agents can act synergistically to effect the treatment or prevention of the various disorders described above. Using this approach, one may be able to achieve therapeutic efficacy with lower dosages of each agent, thus reducing the potential for adverse side effects.
  • any of the therapeutic methods described above can be applied to any subject in need of such therapy, including, for example, mammals such as dogs, cats, cows, horses, rabbits, monkeys, and most preferably, humans.
  • the invention also relates to the use of galanin receptor-like GPCR genes as part of a diagnostic assay for detecting diseases and abnormalities or susceptibility to diseases and abnormalities related to the presence of mutations in the nucleic acid sequences which encode a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • diseases are related to cell transformation, such as tumors and cancers, and various cardiovascular disorders, including hypertension and hypotension, as well as diseases arising from abnormal blood flow, abnormal angiotensin-induced aldosterone secretion, and other abnormal control of fluid and electrolyte homeostasis.
  • differences can be determined between the cDNA or genomic sequence of individuals afflicted with a disease and normal individuals. If a mutation is observed in some or all of the afflicted individuals but not in normal individuals, then the mutation is likely to be the causative agent of the disease. Sequence differences between a reference gene and a gene having mutations can be revealed by the direct DNA sequencing method. In addition, cloned DNA segments can be employed as probes to detect specific DNA segments. The sensitivity of this method is greatly enhanced when combined with PCR. For example, a sequencing primer can be used with a double-sfranded PCR product or a single-stranded template molecule generated by a modified PCR. The sequence determination is performed by conventional procedures using radiolabeled nucleotides or by automatic sequencing procedures using fluorescent tags.
  • DNA sequence differences can be carried out by detection of alteration in elecfrophoretic mobility of DNA fragments in ' gels with or without denaturing agents. Small sequence deletions and insertions can be visualized by high resolution gel electrophoresis. DNA fragments of different sequences can be distinguished on denaturing formamide gradient gels in which the mobilities of different DNA fragments are retarded in the gel at different positions according to their specific melting or partial melting temperatures (see, e.g., Myers et al, Science 230, 1242, 1985). Sequence changes at specific locations can also be revealed by nuclease protection assays, such as RNase and S 1 protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g., Cotton et al, Proc. Natl.
  • the detection of a specific DNA sequence can be performed by methods such as hybridization, RNase protection, chemical cleavage, direct DNA sequencing or the use of restriction enzymes and Southern blotting of genomic DNA.
  • direct methods such as gel-electrophoresis and DNA sequencing, mutations can also be detected by in situ analysis.
  • Another embodiment is a diagnostic assay for detecting altered levels of galanin receptor-like polypeptides in various tissues.
  • Assays used to detect levels of the receptor polypeptides in a sample derived from a host are well known to those of skill in the art and include radioimmunoassays, competitive binding assays, Western blot analysis, and ELISA assays.
  • AU patents and patent applications cited in this disclosure are expressly inco ⁇ orated herein by reference. The above disclosure generally describes the present invention. A more complete understanding can be obtained by reference to the following specific examples which are provided for pu ⁇ oses of illustration only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
  • the polynucleotide of SEQ ID NO: 3 is inserted into the expression vector pCEV4 and the expression vector pCEV4-galanin receptor-like polypeptide obtained is fransfected into human embryonic kidney 293 cells.
  • the cells are scraped from a culture flask into 5 ml of Tris HCl, 5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5, and lysed by sonication. Cell lysates are centrifuged at 1000 rpm for 5 minutes at 4°C. The supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 x g for 20 minutes at 4°C.
  • the pellet is suspended in binding buffer containing 50 mM Tris HCl, 5 mM MgSO 4 , 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl, pH 7.5, supplemented with 0.1 % BSA, 2 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 mg/ml phosphoramidon.
  • Optimal membrane suspension dilutions defined as the protein concentration required to bind less than 10 % of an added radioligand, i.e. 125 I-labeled porcine galanin, are added to 96-well polypropylene microtiter plates containing ligand, non-labeled peptides, and binding buffer to a final volume of 250 ml.
  • membrane preparations are incubated in the presence of increasing concenfrations (0.1 nM to 4 nM) of 125 I ligand.
  • Binding reaction mixtures are incubated for one hour at 30°C. The reaction is stopped by filtration through GF/B filters treated with 0.5% polyethyleneimine, using a cell harvester. Radioactivity is measured by scintillation counting, and data are analyzed by a computerized non-linear regression program. Non-specific binding is defined as the amount of radioactivity remaining after incubation of membrane protein in the presence of 100 nM of unlabeled peptide. Protein concentration is measured by the Bradford method using Bio-Rad Reagent, with bovine serum albumin as a standard. The galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2 is demonstrated. EXAMPLE 2
  • Transfected cells from culture flasks are scraped into 5 ml of Tris-HCl, 5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5, and lysed by sonication.
  • the cell lysates are centrifuged at 1000 ⁇ m for 5 min. at 4°C, and the supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 x g for 20 min. at 4°C.
  • the pellet is suspended in binding buffer (50 mM Tris-HCl, 5 mM MgSO 4 , 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl at pH 7.5 supplemented with 0.1% BSA, 2 ⁇ g/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 ⁇ g/ml phosphoramidon).
  • binding buffer 50 mM Tris-HCl, 5 mM MgSO 4 , 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl at pH 7.5 supplemented with 0.1% BSA, 2 ⁇ g/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 ⁇ g/ml phosphoramidon.
  • Optimal membrane suspension dilutions defined as the protein concentration required to bind less than 10% of the added radioligand, i.e.
  • I25 I-labeled porcine galanin are added to 96-well polypropylene microtiter plates containing I-labeled peptide, non-labeled peptides, and binding buffer to a final volume of 250 ⁇ l.
  • cAMP cyclic AMP
  • Infracellular free calcium concentration can be measured by microspecfrofluorometry using the fluorescent indicator dye Fura-2/AM (Bush et al, J. Neurochem. 57, 562- 74, 1991).
  • Stably fransfected cells are seeded onto a 35 mm culture dish containing a glass coverslip insert. Cells are washed with HBS , incubated with a test compound, and loaded with 100 ⁇ l of Fura-2/AM (10 ⁇ M) for 20-40 minutes. After washing with HBS to remove the Fura-2/AM solution, cells are equilibrated in HBS for 10- 20 minutes. Cells are then visualized under the 40X objective of a Leitz Fluovert FS microscope.
  • Fluorescence emission is determined at 510 nM, with excitation wavelengths alternating between 340 nM and 380 nM.
  • Raw fluorescence data are converted to calcium concenfrations using standard calcium concentration curves and software analysis techniques.
  • a test compound which increases the fluorescence by at least 15% relative to fluorescence in the absence of a test compound is identified as a compound which mobilizes infracellular calcium.
  • LM(tk-) cells which stably express human galanin receptor-like GPCR cDNA are plated in 96-well plates and grown to confluence.
  • the growth medium is changed to 100 ⁇ l of medium containing 1% serum and 0.5 ⁇ Ci 3 H-myinositol.
  • the plates are incubated overnight in a CO 2 incubator (5% CO at 37°C).
  • the medium is removed and replaced by 200 ⁇ l of PBS containing 10 mM LiCl, and the cells are equilibrated with the new medium for 20 minutes. During this interval, cells also are equilibrated with antagonist, added as a 10 ⁇ l aliquot of a 20-fold concentrated solution in PBS.
  • the 3 H-inositol phosphate accumulation from inositol phospholipid metabolism is started by adding 10 ⁇ l of a solution containing a test compound. To the first well
  • test compound 10 ⁇ l are added to measure basal accumulation. Eleven different concentrations of test compound are assayed in the following 11 wells of each plate row. All assays are performed in duplicate by repeating the same additions in two consecutive plate rows.
  • the plates are incubated in a CO 2 incubator for one hour.
  • the reaction is terminated by adding 15 ⁇ l of 50% v/v trichloroacetic acid (TCA), followed by a 40 minute incubation at 4°C.
  • TCA 50% v/v trichloroacetic acid
  • the content of the wells is transfe ⁇ ed to a Multiscreen HV filter plate (Milhpore) containing Dowex AG1-X8 (200-400 mesh, formate form).
  • the filter plates are prepared by adding
  • the 3 H-IPs are eluted into empty 96-well plates with 200 ⁇ l of 1.2 M ammonium formate/0.1 formic acid.
  • the content of the wells is added to 3 ml of scintillation cocktail, and radioactivity is determined by liquid scintillation counting.
  • Binding assays are carried out in a binding buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 0.5% BSA, and 5 mM MgCl 2 .
  • the standard assay for radioligand binding to membrane fragments comprising GPCR homo log 2 polypeptides is carried out as follows in 96 well microtiter plates (e.g., Dynatech Immulon II Removawell plates). Radioligand is diluted in binding buffer+ PMSF/Baci to the desired cpm per 50 ⁇ l, then 50 ⁇ l aliquots are added to the wells. For non-specific binding samples, 5 ⁇ l of 40 ⁇ M cold ligand also is added per well.
  • Binding is initiated by adding 150 ⁇ l per well of membrane diluted to the desired concentration (10-30 ⁇ g membrane protein/well) in binding buffer+ PMSF/Baci. Plates are then covered with Linbro mylar plate sealers (Flow Labs) and placed on a Dynatech Microshaker II. Binding is allowed to proceed at room temperature for 1-2 hours and is stopped by centrifuging the plate for 15 minutes at 2,000 x g. The supematants are decanted, and the membrane pellets are washed once by addition of
  • ⁇ tnembrane pellets are resuspended in 200 ⁇ l per microtiter plate well of ice-cold binding buffer without BSA. Then 5 ⁇ l per well of 4 mM N-5-azido-2-nitrobenzoyloxysuccinimide (ANB-NOS, Pierce) in DMSO is added and mixed. The samples are held on ice and UV-i ⁇ adiated for 10 minutes with a Mineralight R-52G lamp (UVP Inc., San Gabriel, Calif.) at a distance of 5-10 cm. Then the samples are fransfe ⁇ ed to
  • Membrane solubilization is carried out in buffer containing 25 mM Tris , pH 8, 10%o glycerol (w/v) and 0.2 mM CaCl 2 (solubilization buffer).
  • the highly soluble detergents including Triton X-100, deoxycholate, deoxycholate:lyso lecithin, CHAPS, and zwittergent are made up in solubilization buffer at 10% concenfrations and stored as frozen aliquots. Lysolecithin is made up fresh because of insolubility upon freeze-thawing and digitonin is made fresh at lower concentrations due to its more limited solubility.
  • washed pellets after the binding step are resuspended free of visible particles by pipetting and vortexing in solubilization buffer at 100,000 x g for 30 minutes.
  • solubilization buffer at 100,000 x g for 30 minutes.
  • the supematants are removed and held on ice and the pellets are discarded.
  • the intact R:L complex can be assayed by four different methods. All are carried out on ice or in a cold room at 4- 10°C).
  • Binding of biotinyl-receptor to GH 4 Cl membranes is carried out as described above. Incubations are for 1 hour at room temperature. In the standard purification protocol, the binding incubations contain 10 nM Bio-S29. I 25 l ligand is added as a tracer at levels of 5,000-100,000 cpm per mg of membrane protein. Control incubations contain 10 ⁇ M cold ligand to saturate the receptor with non-biotinylated ligand.
  • Solubilization of receptor:ligand complex also is carried out as described above, with 0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin in solubilization buffer containing 0.2 mM MgCl 2 , to obtain 100,000 x g supematants containing solubilized R:L complex.
  • Immobilized sfreptavidin (sfreptavidin cross-linked to 6% beaded agarose, Pierce Chemical Co.; "SA-agarose”) is washed in solubilization buffer and added to the solubilized membranes as 1/30 of the final volume. This mixture is incubated with constant stirring by end-over-end rotation for 4-5 hours at 4-10°C. Then the mixture is applied to a column and the non-bound material is washed through. Binding of radioligand to SA-agarose is determined by comparing cpm in the 100,000 x g supernatant with that in the column effluent after adso ⁇ tion to SA-agarose. Finally, the column is washed with 12-15 column volumes of solubilization buffer+0.15% deoxycho late: lyso lecithin +1/500 (vol/vol) 100 x 4pase.
  • the sfreptavidin column is eluted with solubilization buffer+0.1 mM EDTA+0.1 mM EGTA+0.1 mM GTP-gamma-S (Sigma)+0.15% (wt/vol) deoxycholate:lysolecithin +1/1000 (vol/vol) 100.times.4pase.
  • solubilization buffer +0.1 mM EDTA+0.1 mM EGTA+0.1 mM GTP-gamma-S (Sigma)+0.15% (wt/vol) deoxycholate:lysolecithin +1/1000 (vol/vol) 100.times.4pase.
  • Eluates from the sfreptavidin column are incubated overnight (12-15 hours) with immobilized wheat germ agglutinin (WGA agarose, Vector Labs) to adsorb the receptor via interaction of covalently bound carbohydrate with the WGA lectin.
  • the ratio (vol/vol) of WGA-agarose to sfreptavidin column eluate is generally 1 :400. A range from 1 :1000 to 1 :200 also can be used.
  • the resin is pelleted by centrifugation, the supernatant is removed and saved, and the resin is washed 3 times (about 2 minutes each) in buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 8, 5 mM MgCl 2 , and 0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin.
  • buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 8, 5 mM MgCl 2 , and 0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin To elute the WGA-bound receptor, the resin is extracted three times by repeated mixing (vortex mixer on low speed) over a 15-30 minute period on ice, with 3 resin columns each time, of 10 mM N-N'-N"-triacetylchitotriose in the same HEPES buffer used to wash the resin.
  • the resin After each elution step, the resin is centrifuged down and the supernatant is carefully removed, free of WGA-agarose pellets.
  • the three, pooled eluates contain the final, purified receptor.
  • the material non-bound to WGA contain G protein subunits specifically eluted from the sfreptavidin column, as well as non-specific contaminants. All these fractions are stored frozen at -90 °C.
  • a compound is a human galanin receptor-like GPCR antagonist
  • food intake in rats may be stimulated by administration of the human galanin receptor-like GPCR-selective peptide agonist [D-T ⁇ 2 ]-galanin 1-29 through an intracerebroventricular (i.c.v.) cannula.
  • i.c.v. intracerebroventricular
  • a prefe ⁇ ed anatomic location for injection is the hypothalamus, in particular, the paraventricular nucleus.
  • Methods of cannulation and food intake measurements are well-known in the art, as are i.c.v. modes of administration (Kyrkouli et al, 1990, Ogren et al, 1992).
  • T o determine whether a test compound reduces [D-T ⁇ 2 ]-galanin 1-29 stimulated food intake, the test compound is administered either simultaneously with the peptide, or separately, either through cannula, or by subcutaneous, intramuscular, or intraperitoneal injection, or more preferably, orally.
  • the pharmacology of human galanin receptor-like GPCR is studied in COS-7 cells transiently fransfected with a human galanin receptor-like GPCR-cncoding cDNA.
  • Membrane preparations of COS-7 cells fransfected with K985 display specific binding to [ Ijporcine galamn. Scatchard analysis of equilibrium saturation binding data is used to determine K ⁇ j and B max .
  • the pharmacological properties of human galanin receptor-like GPCR cDNA are probed by measuring the binding affinities of a series of galanin analogs, and compared to those of the rat GALRl receptor expressed in the same host cell line.
  • Purified galanin receptor-like polypeptides comprising a glutathione-S-fransferase protein and absorbed onto glutathione-derivatized wells of 96-well microtiter plates are contacted with test compounds from a small molecule library at pH 7.0 in a physiological buffer solution.
  • Galanin receptor-like polypeptides comprise an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2.
  • the test compounds comprise a fluorescent tag. The samples are incubated for 5 minutes to one hour. Control samples are incubated in the absence of a test compound.
  • the buffer solution containing the test compounds is washed from the wells.
  • Binding of a test compound to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide is detected by fluorescence measurements of the contents of the wells.
  • a test compound which increases the fluorescence in a well by at least 15% relative to fluorescence of a well in which a test compound was not incubated is identified as a compound which binds to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
  • test compound is administered to a culture of human CHO cells which express human galanin receptor-like GPCR and incubated at 37 °C for 10 to 45 minutes.
  • a culture of the same type of cells incubated for the same time without the test compound provides a negative control.
  • RNA is isolated from the two cultures as described in Chirgwin et al, Biochem. 18, 5294-99, 1979).
  • Northern blots are prepared using 20 to 30 ⁇ g total RNA and hybridized with a 2 P-labeled galanin receptor-like GPCR-specific probe at 65° C in Express-hyb (CLONTECH).
  • the probe comprises at least 11 contiguous nucleotides selected from the complement of SEQ ID NO:3.
  • a test compound which decreases the galanin receptor-like GPCR-specific signal relative to the signal obtained in the absence of the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of galanin receptor-like GPCR gene expression.
  • RT-PCR Reverse Transcription-Polymerase Chain Reaction
  • galanin receptor-like GPCR is involved in the disease process of diabetes
  • the following whole body panel is screened to show predominant or relatively high expression: subcutaneous and mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone ma ⁇ ow, brain, colon, fetal brain, heart, hypothalamus, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle, small intestine, spleen, stomach, testis, thymus, thyroid, trachea, and uterus.
  • Human islet cells and an islet cell library also are tested.
  • the expression of galanin receptor-like GPCR in cells derived from normal individuals with the expression of cells derived from diabetic individuals is compared.
  • adipose tissue subcutaneous adipose tissue, mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone ma ⁇ ow, brain (cerebellum, spinal cord, cerebral cortex, caudate, medulla, substantia nigra, and putamen), colon, fetal brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle small intestine, spleen, stomach, testes, thymus, thyroid trachea, and uterus.
  • the following whole body panel is screened to show predominant or relatively high expression in lung or immune tissues: brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, trachea, bone marrow, colon, small intestine, spleen, stomach, thymus, mammary gland, skeletal muscle, prostate, testis, uterus, cerebellum, fetal brain, fetal liver, spinal cord, placenta, adrenal gland, pancreas, salivary gland, thyroid, peripheral blood leukocytes, lymph node, and tonsil.
  • lung or immune tissues brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, trachea, bone marrow, colon, small intestine, spleen, stomach, thymus, mammary gland, skeletal muscle, prostate, testis, uterus, cerebellum, fetal brain, fetal liver, spinal cord, placenta, adrenal gland, pancreas, salivary gland, thyroid, peripheral blood leukocytes, lymph node, and tonsil.
  • lung and immune system cells are screened to localize expression to particular cell subsets: lung microvascular endothelial cells, bronchial/trachial epithelial cells, bronchial/trachial smooth muscle cells, lung fibroblasts, T cells (T helper 1 subset, T helper 2 subset, NKT cell subset, and cytotoxic T lymphocytes), B cells, mononuclear cells (monocytes and macrophages), mast cells, eosinophils, neutrophils, and dendritic cells.
  • T cells T helper 1 subset, T helper 2 subset, NKT cell subset, and cytotoxic T lymphocytes
  • B cells mononuclear cells (monocytes and macrophages)
  • mast cells eosinophils, neutrophils, and dendritic cells.
  • the following tissues are screened: fetal and adult brain, muscle, heart, lung, kidney, liver, thymus, testis, colon, placenta, trachea, pancreas, kidney, gastric mucosa, colon, liver, cerebellum, skin, cortex (Alzheimer's and normal), hypothalamus, cortex, amygdala, cerebellum, hippocampus, choroid, plexus, thalamus, and spinal cord.
  • Quantitative expression profiling is performed by the form of quantitative PCR analysis called "kinetic analysis” first described in Higuchi et al., BioTechnology 10, 413-17, 1992, and Higuchi et al, BioTechnology 11, 1026-30, 1993. The principle is that at any given cycle within the exponential phase of PCR, the amount of product is proportional to the initial number of template copies.
  • the probe is cleaved by the 5 '-3' endonuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase and a fluorescent dye released in the medium (Holland et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • the amplification of an endogenous control can be performed to standardize the amount of sample RNA added to a reaction.
  • the control of choice is the 18S ribosomal RNA. Because reporter dyes with differing emission spectra are available, the target and the endogenous confrol can be independently quantified in the same tube if probes labeled with different dyes are used.
  • RNA extraction and cDNA preparation Total RNA from the tissues listed above was used for expression quantification. RNAs labeled "from autopsy” were extracted from autoptic tissues with the TRIzol reagent (Life Technologies, MD) according to the manufacturer's protocol. . -
  • RNA Fifty ⁇ g of each RNA were treated with DNase I for 1 hour at 37°C in the following reaction mix: 0.2 U/ ⁇ l RNase-free DNase I (Roche Diagnostics, Germany); 0.4 U/ ⁇ l RNase inhibitor (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.9; lOmM MgCl 2 ; 50 mM NaCl; and 1 mM DTT.
  • RNA from the autoptic tissues were DNase treated with the DNA-free kit purchased from Ambion (Ambion, TX). After resuspension and spectrophotometric quantification, each sample was reverse transcribed with the TaqMan Reverse Transcription Reagents (PE Applied Biosystems, CA) according to the manufacturer's protocol. The final concentration of RNA in the reaction mix was
  • Quantification experiments were performed on 10 ng of reverse transcribed RNA from each sample. Each determination was done in triplicate.
  • the assay reaction mix was as follows: IX final TaqMan Universal PCR Master Mix (from 2X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from 2X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from 2X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from 2X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from
  • Overnight fasted normal rats or mice have elevated rates of gluconeogenesis as do streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats or mice fed ad libitum.
  • Rats are made diabetic with a single intravenous injection of 40 mg/kg of streptozotocin while C57BL/KsJ mice are given 40- 60 mgkg i.p. for 5 consecutive days.
  • Blood glucose is measured from tail-tip blood and then compounds are administered via different routes (p.o., i.p., i.v., s.c). Blood is collected at various times thereafter and glucose measured. Alternatively, compounds are administered for several days, then the animals are fasted overnight, blood is collected and plasma glucose measured. Compounds that inhibit glucose production will decrease plasma glucose levels compared to the vehicle-treated control group.
  • Both ob/ob and db/db mice as well as diabetic Zucker rats are hyperglycemic, hyperinsulinemic and insulin resistant.
  • the animals are pre-bled, their glucose levels measured, and then they are grouped so that the mean glucose level is the same for each group.
  • Compounds are administered daily either q.d. or b.i.d. by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c.) for 7-28 days. Blood is collected at various times and plasma glucose and insulin levels determined. Compounds that improve insulin sensitivity in these models will decrease both plasma glucose and insulin levels when compared to the vehicle- treated control group.
  • Compounds that enhance insulin secretion from the pancreas will increase plasma insulin levels and improve the disappearance of plasma glucose following the administration of a glucose load.
  • compounds are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c. or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice.
  • an intravenous glucose load (0.4g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later. Plasma insulin levels are determined.
  • Compounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose.
  • animals When measuring glucose disappearance, animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or infraperitoneal glucose load (lg/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60 and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined. Compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
  • test compounds which regulate pristanoyl-CoA oxidase-like enzyme are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c, or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice.
  • an intravenous glucose load (0.4g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later. Plasma insulin levels are determined.
  • Test compounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose.
  • mice When measuring glucose disappearance, animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or infraperitoneal glucose load (lg/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60, and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined. Test compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
  • Overnight fasted normal rats or mice have elevated rates of gluconeogenesis as do streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats or mice fed ad libitum.
  • Rats are made diabetic with a single intravenous injection of 40 mg/kg of streptozotocin while C57BL/KsJ mice are given 40-60 mg/kg i.p. for 5 consecutive days.
  • Blood glucose is measured from tail-tip blood and then compounds are administered via different routes (p.o., i.p., i.v., s.c). Blood is collected at various times thereafter and glucose measured. Alternatively, compounds are administered for several days, then the animals are fasted overnight, blood is collected and plasma glucose measured. Compounds that inhibit glucose production will decrease plasma glucose levels compared to the vehicle-freated control group.
  • Both ob/ob and db/db mice as well as diabetic Zucker rats are hyperglycemic, hyperinsulinemic and insulin resistant.
  • the animals are pre-bled, their glucose levels measured, and then they are grouped so that the mean glucose level is the same for each group.
  • Compounds are administered daily either q.d. or b.i.d. by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c.) for 7-28 days. Blood is collected at various times and plasma glucose and insulin levels determined. Compounds that improve insulin sensitivity in these models will decrease both plasma glucose and insulin levels when compared to the vehicle-treated confrol group.
  • Compounds that enhance insulin secretion from the pancreas will increase plasma insulin levels and improve the disappearance of plasma glucose following the administration of a glucose load.
  • compounds are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c. or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice.
  • an intravenous glucose load (0.4g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later.
  • Plasma insulin levels are determined.
  • Com- pounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose.
  • animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or intraperitoneal glucose load (lg/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60 and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined.
  • Compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
  • Acute pain is measured on a hot plate mainly in rats.
  • Two variants of hot plate testing are used: In the classical variant animals are put on a hot surface (52 to 56 C) and the latency time is measured until the animals show nocifensive behavior, such as stepping or foot licking.
  • the other variant is an increasing temperature hot plate where the experimental animals are put on a surface of neutral temperature. Subsequently this surface is slowly but constantly heated until the animals begin to lick a hind paw. The temperature which is reached when hind paw licking begins is a measure for pain threshold.
  • Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated confrol group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t, i.c.v., s.c, infradennal, fransdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t, i.c.v., s.c, infradennal, fransdermal
  • Persistent pain is measured with the formalin or capsaicin test, mainly in rats.
  • a solution of 1 to 5% formalin or 10 to 100 ⁇ g capsaicin is injected into one hind paw of the experimental animal.
  • the animals show nocifensive reactions like flinching, licking and biting of the affected paw.
  • the number of nocifensive reactions within a time frame of up to 90 minutes is a measure for intensity of pain.
  • Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to formalin or capsaicin administration.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • Neuropathic pain is induced by different variants of unilateral sciatic nerve injury mainly in rats.
  • the operation is performed under anesthesia.
  • the first variant of sciatic nerve injury is produced by placing loosely constrictive ligatures around the common sciatic nerve.
  • the second variant is the tight ligation of about the half of the diameter of the common sciatic nerve.
  • a group of models is used in which tight ligations or transections are made of either the L5 and L6 spinal nerves, or the L% spinal nerve only.
  • the fourth variant involves an axotomy of two of the three terminal branches of the sciatic nerve (tibial and common peroneal nerves) leaving the remaining sural nerve intact whereas the last variant comprises the axotomy of only the tibial branch leaving the sural and common nerves uninjured. Control animals are treated with a sham operation.
  • the nerve injured animals develop a chronic mechanical allodynia, cold allodynioa, as well as a thermal hyperalgesia.
  • Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc. -Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA; Electronic von Frey
  • Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy), or by means of a cold plate of 5 to 10 C where the nocifensive reactions of the affected hind paw are counted as a measure of pain intensity.
  • a further test for cold induced pain is the counting of nocifensive reactions, or duration of nocifensive responses after plantar administration of acetone to the affected hind limb.
  • Chronic pain in general is assessed by registering the circadanian rhytms in activity (Surjo and Arndt, Universitat zu K ⁇ ln, Cologne, Germany), and by scoring differences in gait (foot print patterns; FOOTPRINTS program, Klapdor et al., 1997. A low cost method to analyse footprint patterns. J. Neurosci. Methods 75, 49-54). Compounds are tested against sham operated and vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t, i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t, i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal
  • Inflammatory pain is induced mainly in rats by injection of 0.75 mg ca ⁇ ageenan or complete Freund's adjuvant into one hind paw.
  • the animals develop an edema with mechanical allodynia as well as thermal hyperalgesia.
  • Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer,
  • Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy, Paw thermal stimulator, G. Ozaki, University of California, USA).
  • Plant Test Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy
  • Paw thermal stimulator G. Ozaki, University of California, USA
  • edema measurement two methods are being used. In the first method, the animals are sacrificed and the affected hindpaws sectioned and weighed. The second method comprises differences in paw volume by measuring water displacement in a plethysmometer (Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy).
  • Compounds are tested against uninflamed as well as vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal
  • Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA).
  • Compounds are tested against diabetic and non-diabetic vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal
  • Degeneration of the dopaminergic nigrostriatal and striatopallidal pathways is the central pathological event in Parkinson's disease. This disorder has been mimicked experimentally in rats using single/sequential unilateral stereotaxic injections of
  • mice Male Wistar rats (Harlan Winkelmann, Germany), weighing 200+250 g at the beginning of the experiment, are used. The rats are maintained in a temperature- and humidity-controlled environment under a 12 h light/dark cycle with free access to food and water when not in experimental sessions. The following in vivo protocols are approved by the governmental authorities. All efforts are made to minimize animal suffering, to reduce the number of animals used, and to utilize alternatives to in vivo techniques.
  • Animals are administered pargyline on the day of surgery (Sigma, St. Louis, MO, USA; 50 mg/kg i.p.) in order to inhibit metabolism of 6-OHDA by monoamine oxidase and desmethylimipramine HCl (Sigma; 25 mg/kg i.p.) in order to prevent uptake of 6-OHDA by noradrenergic terminals. Thirty minutes later the rats are anesthetized with sodium pentobarbital (50 mg/kg) and placed in a stereotaxic frame.
  • Forelimb akinesia is assessed three weeks following lesion placement using a modified stepping test protocol.
  • the animals are held by the experimenter with one hand fixing the hindlimbs and slightly raising the hind part above the surface.
  • One paw is touching the table, and is then moved slowly sideways (5 s for 1 m), first in the forehand and then in the backhand direction.
  • the number of adjusting steps is counted for both paws in the backhand and forehand direction of movement.
  • the sequence of testing is right paw forehand and backhand adjusting stepping, followed by left paw forehand and backhand directions.
  • the test is repeated three times on three consecutive days, after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing.
  • Forehand adjusted stepping reveals no consistent differences between lesioned and healthy control animals. Analysis is therefore restricted to backhand adjusted stepping.
  • Balance adjustments following postural challenge are also measured during the stepping test sessions.
  • the rats are held in the same position as described in the stepping test and, instead of being moved sideways, tilted by the experimenter towards the side of the paw touching the table. This manoeuvre results in loss of balance and the ability of the rats to regain balance by forelimb movements is scored on a scale ranging from 0 to 3. Score 0 is given for a normal forelimb placement. When the forelimb movement is delayed but recovery of postural balance detected, score 1 is given. Score 2 represents a clear, yet insufficient, forelimb reaction, as evidenced by muscle contraction, but lack of success in recovering balance, and score 3 is given for no reaction of movement. The test is repeated three times a day on each side for three consecutive days after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing. Staircase Test (Paw Reaching)
  • a modified version of the staircase test is used for evaluation of paw reaching behaviour three weeks following primary and secondary lesion placement.
  • Plexiglass test boxes with a cenfral platform and a removable staircase on each side are used.
  • the apparatus is designed such that only the paw on the same side at each staircase can be used, thus providing a measure of independent forelimb use.
  • the animals are left in the test boxes for 15 min.
  • the double staircase is filled with 7 x 3 chow pellets (Precision food pellets, formula: P, purified rodent diet, size 45 mg; Sandown Scientific) on each side. After each test the number of pellets eaten
  • MPTP neurotoxin l-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,6-tetrahydro-pyridine
  • DAergic mesencephalic dopaminergic
  • MPTP leads to a marked decrease in the levels of dopamine and its metabolites, and in the number of dopaminergic terminals in the striatum as well as severe loss of the tyrosine hydroxylase (TH)-immunoreactive cell bodies in the substantia nigra, pars compacta.
  • TH tyrosine hydroxylase
  • mice are perfused franscardially with 3 ml thiopental (1 g/40 ml i.p., Tyrol Pharma).
  • the mice are perfused franscardially with 3 ml thiopental (1 g/40 ml i.p., Tyrol Pharma).
  • the mice are perfused franscardially with 3 ml thiopental (1 g/40 ml i.p., Tyrol Pharma).
  • 25 ⁇ m sections are taken from the genu of the co ⁇ us callosum (AP 1.7 mm) to the hippocampus (AP 21.8 mm) and from AP 24.16 to AP 26.72. Forty-six sections are cut and stored in assorters in 0.25 M Tris buffer (pH 7.4) for immunohistochemistry.
  • TH free-floating tyrosine hydroxylase
  • the system logs the fall as the end of the experiment for that mouse, and the total time on the rotarod, as well as the time of the fall and all the set-up parameters, are recorded.
  • the system also allows a weak cu ⁇ ent to be passed through the base grid, to aid training.
  • the object recognition task has been designed to assess the effects of experimental manipulations on the cognitive performance of rodents.
  • a rat is placed in an open field, in which two identical objects are present.
  • the rats inspects both objects during the first trial of the object recognition task.
  • a second trial after a retention interval of for example 24 hours, one of the two objects used int the first trial, the 'familiar' object, and a novel object are placed in the open field.
  • the inspection time at each of the objects is registered.
  • the basic measures in the OR task is the time spent by a rat exploring the two object the second trial. Good retention is reflected by higher exploitation times towards the novel than the 'familiar' object.
  • Administration of the putative cognition enhancer prior to the first trial predominantly allows assessment of the effects on acquisition, and eventually on consolidation processes.
  • Administration of the testing compound after the first trial allows to assess the effects on consolidation processes, whereas administration before the second trial allows to measure effects on retrieval processes.
  • the passive avoidance task assesses memory performance in rats and mice.
  • the inhibitory avoidance apparatus consists of a two-compartment box with a light compartment and a dark compartment.
  • the two compartments are separated by a guillotine door that can be operated by the experimenter.
  • a threshold of 2 cm separates the two compartments when the guillotine door is raised.
  • the illumination in the dark compartment is about 2 lux.
  • the light intensity is about 500 lux at the center of the floor of the light compartment.
  • Two habituation sessions, one shock session, and a retention session are given, separated by inter-session intervals of 24 hours.
  • the rat is allowed to explore the apparatus for 300 sec.
  • the rat is placed in the light compartment, facing the wall opposite to the guillotine door. After an accommodation period of 15 sec. the guillotine door is opened so that all parts of the apparatus can be visited freely. Rats normally avoid brighly lit areas and will enter the dark compartment within a few seconds.
  • the guillotine door between the compartments is lowered as soon as the rat has entered the dark compartment with its four paws, and a scrambled 1 mA footshock is administered for 2 sec.
  • the rat is removed from the apparatus and put back into its home cage.
  • the procedure during the retention session is identical to that of the habituation sessions.
  • the step-through latency that is the first latency of entering the dark compartment (in sec.) during the retention session is an index of the memory performance of the animal; the longer the latency to enter the dark compartment, the better the retention is.
  • Scopolamine impairs the memory performance during the retention session 24 hours later. If the test compound increases the enter latency compared with the scopolamine-treated confrols, is is likely to possess cognition enhancing potential.
  • the Morris water escape task measures spatial orientation learning in rodents. It is a test system that has extensively been used to investigate the effects of putative therapeutic on the cognitive functions of rats and mice.
  • the performance of an animal is assessed in a circular water tank with an escape platform that is submerged about 1 cm below the surface of the water. The escape platform is not visible for an animal swimming in the water tank.
  • Abundant extra-maze cues are provided by the furniture in the room, including desks, computer equipment, a second water tank, the presence of the experimenter, and by a radio on a shelf that is playing softly.
  • the animals receive four trials during five daily acquisition sessions.
  • a trial is started by placing an anmimal into the pool, facing the wall of the tank. Each of four starting positions in the quadrants north, east, south, and west is used once in a series of four trials; their order is randomized.
  • the escape platform is always in the same position.
  • a trial is terminated as soon as the animal had climbs onto the escape platform or when 90 seconds have elapsed, whichever event occurs first. Teh animal is allowed to stay on the platform for 30 seconds. Then it is taken from the platform and the next trial is started. If an amimal did not find the platform within 90 seconds it is put on the platform by the experimenter and is allowed to stay there for 30 seconds.
  • an additional trial is given as a probe trial: the platform is removed, and the time the animal spents in the four quadrants is measured for 30 or 60 seconds.
  • the probe trial all animals start from the same start position, opposite to the quadrant where the escape platform had been positioned during acquisition.
  • rats or mice with specific brain lesions which impair cognitive functions, or animals treated with compounds such as scopolamine or MK-801, which interfere with normal learning, or aged animals which suffer from cognitive deficits, are used.
  • the T-maze spontaneous alternation task assesses the spatial memory performance in mice.
  • the start arm and the two goal arms of the T-maze are provided with guillotine doors which can be operated manually by the experimenter.
  • a mouse is put into the start arm at the beginning of training.
  • the guillotine door is closed.
  • the 'forced trial' either the left or right goal arm is blocked by lowering the guillotine door.
  • the mouse After the mouse has been released from the start arm, it will negotiate the maze, eventually enter the open goal arm, and return to the start position, where it will be confined for 5 seconds, by lowering the guillotine door.
  • the animal can choose freely between the left and right goal arm (all guillotine-doors opened) diring 14 'free choice' trials.
  • the other one is closed.
  • the mouse eventually returns to the start arm and is free to visit whichever goalarm it wants after having been confined to the start arm for 5 seconds.
  • the animal is removed from the maze. During training, the animal is never handeled.
  • the per-cent alternations out of 14 trials is calculated. This per-centage and the total time needed to complete the first forced trial and the subsequent 14 free choice trials (in s) is analysed. Cognitive deficits are usually induced by an injection of scopolamine, 30 min before the start of the training session. Scopolamine reduced the per-cent alternations to chance level, or below. A cognition enhancer, which is always administered before the training session, will at least partially, antagonize the scopolamine-induced reduction in the spontaneous alternation rate.
  • Kieffer, B. Befort, K., Gaveriaux-Ruff, C. and Hirth, C. G. (1992).

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)

Abstract

Reagents which regulate human galanin receptor-like GPCR and reagents which bind to human galanin receptor-like gene products can be used to regulate the effect of galanin for therapeutic purposes. Treatment of pathophysiological disorders such as eating disorders, including obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, asthma, pain, depression, ischemia, Alzheimer's disease, sleep disorders, migraine, anxiety, and reproductive disorders can be treated. Processes such as cognition, analgesia, sensory processing (olfactory, visual), processing or visceral information, motor coordination, modulation of dopaminergic activity, and neuroendocrine function can be modulated.

Description

REGULATION OF HUMAN GALANIN RECEPTOR-LIKE G PROTEIN COUPLED RECEPTOR
TECHNICAL FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to the area of G-protein coupled receptors. More particularly, it relates to the area of galanin receptor-like G protein coupled receptors and their regulation for therapeutic purposes.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
G-Protein Coupled Receptors
Many medically significant biological processes are mediated by signal transduction pathways that involve G-proteins (Lefkowitz, Nature 351, 353-354, 1991). The family of G-protein coupled receptors (GPCR) includes receptors for hormones, neurotransmitters, growth factors, and viruses. Specific examples of GPCRs include receptors for such diverse agents as dopamine, calcitonin, adrenergic hormones, endothelin, cAMP, adenosine, acetylcholine, serotonin, histamine, thrombin, kinin, follicle stimulating hormone, opsins, endothelial differentiation gene-1, rhodopsins, odorants, cytomegalovirus, G-proteins themselves, effector proteins such as phospholipase C, adenyl cyclase, and phosphodiesterase, and actuator proteins such as protein kinase A and protein kinase C.
GPCRs possess seven conserved membrane-spanning domains connecting at least eight divergent hydrophilic loops. GPCRs (also known as 7TM receptors) have been characterized as including these seven conserved hydrophobic stretches of about 20 to 30 amino acids, connecting at least eight divergent hydrophilic loops. Most GPCRs have single conserved cysteine residues in each of the first two extracellular loops, which form disulfide bonds that are believed to stabilize functional protein structure. The seven fransmembrane regions are designated as TM1, TM2, TM3, TM4, TM5, TM6, and TM7. TM3 has been implicated in signal fransduction.
Phosphorylation and lipidation (palmitylation or farnesylation) of cysteine residues can influence signal fransduction of some GPCRs. Most GPCRs contain potential phosphorylation sites within the third cytoplasmic loop and/or the carboxy terminus. For several GPCRs, such as the β-adrenergic receptor, phosphorylation by protein kinase A and/or specific receptor kinases mediates receptor desensitization.
For some receptors, the ligand binding sites of GPCRs are believed to comprise hydrophilic sockets formed by several GPCR fransmembrane domains. The hydrophilic sockets are suπounded by hydrophobic residues of the GPCRs. The hydrophilic side of each GPCR fransmembrane helix is postulated to face inward and form a polar ligand binding site. TM3 has been implicated in several GPCRs as having a ligand binding site, such as the TM3 aspartate residue. TM5 serines, a TM6 asparagine, and TM6 or TM7 phenylalanines or tyrosines also are implicated in ligand binding.
GPCRs are coupled inside the cell by heterotrimeric G-proteins to various infracellular enzymes, ion channels, and transporters (see Johnson et al., Endoc. Rev.
10, 317-331, 1989). Different G-protein alpha-subunits preferentially stimulate particular effectors to modulate various biological functions in a cell. Phosphorylation of cytoplasmic residues of GPCRs is an important mechanism for the regulation of some GPCRs. For example, in one form of signal fransduction, the effect of hormone binding is the activation of the enzyme, adenylate cyclase, inside the cell. Enzyme activation by hormones is dependent on the presence of the nucleotide GTP. GTP also influences hormone binding. A G-protein connects the hormone receptor to adenylate cyclase. G-protein exchanges GTP for bound GDP when activated by a hormone receptor. The GTP-carrying form then binds to activated adenylate cyclase. Hydrolysis of GTP to GDP, catalyzed by the G-protein itself, returns the G-protein to its basal, inactive form. Thus, the G-protein serves a
MISSING AT THE TIME OF PUBLICATION
hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis coupled with its potent hormonal effects has led to the suggestion that galanin may play an integral role in the hormonal response to stress (Bartfai et al., 1993).
Within the CNS galanin-containing cell bodies are found in the hypothalamus, hippocampus, amygdala, basal forebrain, brainstem nuclei, and spinal cord, with highest concentrations of galanin in the hypothalamus and pituitary (Skofitsch and Jacobowitz, 1985; Bennet et al., 1991; Merchenthaler et al., 1993). The distribution of galanin receptors in the CNS generally complements that of galanin peptide, with high levels of galanin binding observed in the hypothalamus, amygdala, hippocampus, brainstem and dorsal spinal cord (Skofitsch et al., 1986; Merchenthaler et al., 1993; Bartfai et al., 1993). Accordingly, agents modulating the activity of galanin receptors would have multiple potential therapeutic applications in the CNS. One of the most important of these is the regulation of food intake. Galanin injected into the paraventricular nucleus (PVN) of the hypothalamus stimulates feeding in satiated rats
(Kyrkouli et ah, 1990), an effect which is blocked by the peptide galanin antagonist M40 (Crawley et al., 1993). In freely feeding rats, PVN injection of galanin preferentially stimulates fat-preferring feeding (Tempel et al., 1988); importantly, the galanin antagonist M40 administered alone decreases overall fat intake (Leibowitz and Kim, 1992). These data indicate that specific receptors in the hypothalamus mediate the effects of galanin on feeding behavior, and further suggest that agents acting at hypothalamic galanin receptors may be therapeutically useful in the treatment of human eating disorders.
Galanin receptors elsewhere in the CNS may also serve as therapeutic targets. In the spinal cord galanin is released from the terminals of sensory neurons as well as spinal interneurons and appears to play a role in the regulation of pain threshold (Wiesenfeld-Hallin et al., 1992). Intrathecal galanin potentiates the anti-nociceptive effects of morphine in rats and produces analgesia when administered alone (Wiesenfeld-Hallin et al., 1993; Post et al, 1988); galanin receptor agonists may therefore be useful as analgesic agents in the spinal cord. Galanin may also play a role in the development of Alzheimer's disease. In the hippocampus galanin inhibits both the release (Fisone et al., 1987) and efficacy (Palazzi et al., 1988) of acetylcholine, causing an impairment of cognitive functions (Sundsfrom et al, 1988). Autopsy samples from humans afflicted with Alzheimer's disease reveal a galaninergic hyperinnervation of the nucleus basalis (Chan-Palay, 1988), suggesting a role for galanin in the impaired cognition characterizing Alzheimer's disease. Together these data suggest that a galanin antagonist may be effective in ameliorating the symptoms of Alzheimer's disease (see Crawley, 1993). This hypothesis is supported by the report that intraventricular administration of the peptide galanin antagonist M35 improves cognitive performance in rats (Ogren et al.,
1992). Human galanin receptors thus provide targets for therapeutic intervention in multiple CNS disorders.
High-affinity galanin binding sites have been characterized in brain, spinal cord, pancreatic islets and cell lines, and gastrointestinal smooth muscle in several mammalian species, and all show similar affinity for I-porcine galanin (about 0.5- 1 nM) . Nevertheless, recent in vitro and in vivo pharmacological studies in which fragments and analogues of galanin were used suggest the existence of multiple galanin receptor subtypes. For example, a galanin binding site in guinea pig stomach has been reported that exhibits high affinity for porcine galanin (3-29) (Gu, et al.
1995), which is inactive at CNS galanin receptors. The chimeric galanin analogue M15 (galantide) acts as antagonist at CNS galanin receptors (Bartfai et al., 1991) but as a full agonist in gastrointestinal smooth muscle (Gu et al, 1993). Similarly, the galanin-receptor ligand M40 acts as a weak agonist in RINm5F insulinoma cells and a full antagonist in brain (Bartfai et al, 1993a). The pharmacological profile of galanin receptors in RINm5F cells can be further distinguished from those in brain by the differential affinities of [D-Tyr2 ]- and [D-Phe2 ]-gaIanin analogues (Lagny- Pourmir et al., 1989). The chimeric galanin analogue M35 displaces 125I-galanin binding to RINm5F membranes in a biphasic manner, suggesting the presence of multiple galanin receptor subtypes, in this cell line (Gregersen et al., 1993). Multiple galanin receptor subtypes may also co-exist within the CNS. Galanm receptors in the dorsal hippocampus exhibit high affinity for Gal (1-15) but not for Gal (1-29) (Hedlund et al., 1992), suggesting that endogenous proteolytic processing may release bioactive fragments of galanin to act at distinct receptors. The rat pituitary exhibits high-affinity binding for 125I-Bolton and Hunter (N-terminus)- labeled galanin (1-29) but not for [125I]Tyr26 -porcine galanin (Wynick et ah, 1993), suggesting that the pituitary galanin receptor is a C-terminus-preferring subtype. Spinal cord galanin binding sites, while similar to those in brain, show an affinity for the chimeric peptide antagonist M35 intermediate between the brain and smooth muscle (Bartfai et al., 1991), raising the possibility of further heterogeneity.
A galanin receptor cDNA was recently isolated by expression cloning from a human Bowes melanoma cell line (Habert-Ortoli et al., 1994). The pharmacological profile exhibited by this receptor is similar to that observed in brain and pancreas, and on that basis the receptor has been termed GALR1. The cloned human GALR1 receptor binds native human, porcine and rat galanin with about 1 nM affinity (Kj vs. 125I- galanin) and porcine galanin 1-16 at a slightly lower affinity (about 5 nM). Porcine galanin 3-29 does not bind to the receptor. The GALR1 receptor appears to couple to inhibition of adenylate cyclase, with half-maximal inhibition of forskolin-stimulated cAMP production by 1 nM galanin, and maximal inhibition occuπing at about lμM.
Recently the rat homologue of GALR1 was cloned from the RIN14B pancreatic cell line (Burgevin, et al., 1995; Parker et al., 1996). The pharmacologic data reported to date do not suggest substantial differences between the pharmacologic properties of the rat and human GALR1 receptors. Localization studies reveal GALR1 mRNA in rat hypothalamus, ventral hippocampus, brainstem, and spinal cord, regions consistent with roles for galanin in feeding, cognition, and pain transmission. However, GALR1 appears to be distinct from the pituitary and hippocampal receptor subtypes described above. The indication of multiple galanin receptor subtypes within the brain underscores the importance of defining galanin receptor heterogeneity at the molecular level in order to develop specific therapeutic agents for CNS disorders. Pharmacological tools capable of distinguishing galanin receptor subtypes in tissue preparations are only beginning to appear. Several high-affinity peptide-based galanin antagonists have been developed and are proving useful in probing the functions of galanin receptors (see Bartfai et al., 1993), but their peptide character precludes practical use as therapeutic agents. In light of galanin's multiple neuroendocrine roles, therapeutic agents targeting a specific disorder must be selective for the appropriate receptor subtype to minimize side effects. Thus, there is a need in the art to identify additional members of the galanin receptor protein family whose activity can be regulated to provide therapeutic effects.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
It is an object of the invention to provide reagents and methods of regulating a galanin receptor-like GPCR. This and other objects of the invention are provided by one or more of the embodiments described below.
One embodiment of the invention is a galanin receptor-like polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
amino acid sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; and
the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
Yet another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR. A test compound is contacted with a galanin receptor-like polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of: amino acid sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; and
the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
Binding between the test compound and the galanin receptor-like polypeptide is detected. A test compound hich binds to the galanin receptor-like polypeptide is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor- like GPCR.
Another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR. A test compound is contacted with a polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3; and
the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3.
Binding of the test compound to the polynucleotide is detected. A test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR. The agent can work by decreasing the amount of the galanin receptor-like GPCR through interacting with the galanin receptor-like GPCR mRNA.
Another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which regulate the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR. A test compound is contacted with a galanin receptor-like polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
amino acid sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; and
the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
A galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide is detected. A test compound which increases galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide relative to galanin receptor-like GPCR activity in the absence of the test compound is thereby identified as a potential agent for increasing the activity of galanin receptorlike GPCR. A test compound which decreases galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide relative to galanin receptor-like GPCR activity in the absence of the test compound is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
Even another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR. A test compound is contacted with a galanin receptor-like product of a polynucleotide which comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 ; nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3; and
the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3.
Binding of the test compound to the galanin receptor-like product is detected. A test compound which binds to the galanin receptor-like product is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
Still another embodiment of the invention is a method of reducing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR. A cell is contacted with a reagent which specifically binds to a polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or the product encoded by the polynucleotide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3; and the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3.
Galanin receptor-like activity in the cell is thereby decreased.
The invention thus provides a human galanin receptor-like GPCR which can be used to identify galanin analogs as well as compounds which may act as galanin antago- nists at the receptor site. Galanin receptor-like GPCR and fragments thereof also are useful in raising specific antibodies which can block the receptor and effectively prevent galanin binding. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount of a galanin receptor-like GPCR or polypeptide can be used to treat any disorder resulting from or associated with an excess of circulating galanin.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Fig. 1 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. Fig. 2 shows the amino acid sequence deduced from the DNA-sequence of Fig.1. Fig. 3 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to an isolated polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide and being selected from the group consisting of:
a) polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
b) amino acid sequences which are at least about 50% identical to
c) the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; and
d) the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
e) a polynucleotide comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NOS: 1 or 3;
f) a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent conditions to a polynucleotide specified in (a) and (b); g) a polynucleotide the sequence of which deviates from the polynucleotide sequences specified in (a) to (c) due to the degeneration of the genetic code; and
h) a polynucleotide which represents a fragment, derivative or allelic variation of a polynucleotide sequence specified in (a) to (d).
Furthermore, a novel human galanin receptor-like GPCR has been discovered by the present applicant. Human galanin receptor-like GPCR comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2. A coding sequence for human galanin receptorlike GPCR is shown in SEQ ID NO:3. This sequence is contained within the longer sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:l.
Human galanin receptor-like GPCR is 25 % identical to the human galanin receptor encoded on chromosome 5. Therefore, human galanin receptor-like GPCR is expected to be useful for the same purposes as previously identified galanin receptors. This discovery provides a novel approach, through the use of heterologous expression systems, to develop subtype-selective, high-affinity, non-peptide compounds that could serve as therapeutic agents for, inter alia, eating disorders, including obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, pain, depression, ischemia, and
Alzheimer's disease.
Galanin Receptor-Like Polypeptides
Galanin receptor-like polypeptides according to the invention comprise at least 10,
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, or 400 contiguous amino acids selected from SEQ ID NO:2 or a biologically active variant of that amino acid sequence, as defined below. A galanin receptor-like polypeptide of the invention therefore can be a portion of a galanin receptor-like GPCR, a full-length galanin receptor-like GPCR, or a fusion protein comprising all or a portion of a galanin receptor- like GPCR. Galanin receptor-like polypeptides preferably bind galanin or a galanin analog. Activity of a GPCR such as a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be measured using a detectably labeled galanin or galanin analog or by any of a variety of functional assays in which a biological activity mediated by the galanin receptor-like polypeptide results in an observable change in the level of some second messenger system (described in the specific examples, below). Such second messenger systems include, but are not limited to, adenylate cyclase activity, calcium mobilization, ion channel activity, inositol phospholipid hydrolysis, or guanylyl cyclase activity. Heterologous expression systems using appropriate host cells to express the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be used to obtain the desired second messenger coupling. Receptor activity also may be assayed in an oocyte expression system.
Biologically Active Variants
Galanin receptor-like polypeptide variants which are biologically active, i.e., retain the ability to bind galanin or a galanin analog and/or to mediate a biological activity as described above, also are galanin receptor-like polypeptides. Preferably, naturally or non-naturally occurring galanin receptor-like polypeptide variants have amino acid sequences which are at least about 26, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65 or 70, preferably about 75, 90, 96, 98, or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2. Percent identity between a putative galanin receptor-like polypeptide variant and an amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO:2 is determined using the Blast2 alignment program.
Variations in percent identity can be due, for example, to amino acid substitutions, insertions, or deletions. Amino acid substitutions are defined as one for one amino acid replacements. They are conservative in nature when the substituted amino acid has similar structural and or chemical properties. Examples of conservative replace- ments are substitution of a leucine with an isoleucine or valine, an aspartate with a glutamate, or a threonine with a serine. Amino acid insertions or deletions are changes to or within an amino acid sequence. They typically fall in the range of about 1 to 5 amino acids. Guidance in determining which amino acid residues can be substituted, inserted, or deleted without abolishing biological or immunological activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be found using computer programs well known in the art, such as DNASTAR software. Whether an amino acid change results in a biologically active galanin receptor-like polypeptide can readily be determined by assaying for galanin receptor-like polypeptide activity, as described in the specific examples, below.
Fusion Proteins
Fusion proteins are useful for generating antibodies against galanin receptor-like amino acid sequences and for use in various assay systems. For example, fusion proteins can be used to identify proteins which interact with portions of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. Protein affinity chromatography or library-based assays for protein-protein interactions, such as the yeast two-hybrid or phage display systems, can be used for this purpose. Such methods are well known in the art and also can be used as drug screens.
A galanin receptor-like polypeptide fusion protein comprises two polypeptide segments fused together by means of a peptide bond. The first polypeptide segment can comprise at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, or 400 or more contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO:2 or of a biologically active variant, such as those described above. The first polypeptide segment also can comprise full-length galanin receptor-like GPCR.
The second polypeptide segment can be a full-length protein or a protein fragment.
Proteins commonly used in fusion protein construction include β-galactosidase, β- glucuronidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP), autofluorescent proteins, including blue fluorescent protein (BFP), glutathione-S-transferase (GST), luciferase, horseradish peroxidase (HRP), and chloramphenicol acetylfransferase (CAT). Additionally, epitope tags are used in fusion protein constructions, including histidine (His) tags, FLAG tags, influenza hemagglutinin (HA) tags, Myc tags, NSN- G tags, and thioredoxin (Trx) tags. Other fusion constructions can include maltose binding protein (MBP), S-tag, Lex a DΝA binding domain (DBD) fusions, GAL4
DΝA binding domain fusions, and herpes simplex virus (HSN) BP16 protein fusions. A fusion protein also can be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the galanin receptor-like polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety.
A fusion protein can be synthesized chemically, as is known in the art. Preferably, a fusion protein is produced by covalently linking two polypeptide segments or by standard procedures in the art of molecular biology. Recombinant DΝA methods can be used to prepare fusion proteins, for example, by making a DΝA construct which comprises coding sequences selected from SEQ ID ΝO:3 in proper reading frame with nucleotides encoding the second polypeptide segment and expressing the DNA construct in a host cell, as is known in the art. Many kits for constructing fusion proteins are available from companies such as Promega Corporation (Madison, WI), Stratagene (La Jolla, CA), CLONTECH (Mountain View, CA),
Santa Cruz Biotechnology (Santa Cruz, CA), MBL International Corporation (MIC; Watertown, MA), and Quantum Biotechnologies (Montreal, Canada; 1-888-DNA- KITS).
Identification of Species Homoloss
Species homologs of human galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be obtained using
Galanin receptor-like polypeptide polynucleotides (described below) to make suitable probes or primers for screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast, identifying cDNAs which encode homologs of galanin receptor-like polypeptide, and expressing the cDNAs as is known in the art.
Galanin Receptor-Like Polynucleotides
A galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be single- or double-sfranded and comprises a coding sequence or the complement of a coding sequence for a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. A coding sequence for human galanin receptor-like GPCR is shown in SEQ ID NO:3.
Degenerate nucleotide sequences encoding human galanin receptor-like polypeptides, as well as homologous nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, preferably about 75, 90, 96, 98, or 99% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:3 also are galanin receptor-like polynucleotides. Percent sequence identity between the sequences of two polynucleotides is determined using computer programs such as ALIGN which employ the FASTA algorithm, using an affine gap search with a gap open penalty of -12 and a gap extension penalty of -2. Complementary DNA (cDNA) molecules, species homologs, and variants of galanin receptor-like polynucleotides which encode biologically active Galanin receptor-like polypeptides also are galanin receptor-like polynucleotides.Polynucleotides comprising at least 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 15, 18, 20, or 25 contiguous nucleotides of SEQ ID NO:3 or its complement also are galanin receptor-hke polynucleotide polynucleotides. Such polynucleotides can be used, for example, as hybridization probes or antisense oligonucleotides.
Identification of Variants and Homologs of Galanin Receptor-Like Polynucleotides
Variants and homologs of the galanin receptor-like polynucleotides described above also are galanin receptor-like polynucleotides. Typically, homologous galanin receptor-like polynucleotide sequences can be identified by hybridization of candidate polynucleotides to known galanin receptor-like polynucleotides under stringent conditions, as is known in the art. For example, using the following wash conditions~2X SSC (0.3 M NaCl, 0.03 M sodium citrate, pH 7.0), 0.1% SDS, room temperature twice, 30 minutes each; then 2X SSC, 0.1% SDS, 50 °C once, 30 minutes; then 2X SSC, room temperature twice, 10 minutes each—homologous sequences can be identified which contain at most about 25-30% basepair mismatches. More preferably, homologous nucleic acid strands contain 15-25% basepair mismatches, even more preferably 5-15% basepair mismatches.
Species homologs of the galanin receptor-like polynucleotides disclosed herein also can be identified by making suitable probes or primers and screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast. Human variants of galanin receptor-like polynucleotides can be identified, for example, by screening human cDNA expression libraries. It is well known that the Tm of a double-sfranded DNA decreases by 1-1.5°C with every 1% decrease in homology (Bonner et al., J. Mol. Biol. 81, 123 (1973). Variants of human galanin receptor-like polynucleotides or galanin receptor-like polynucleotides of other species can therefore be identified by hybridizing a putative homologous galanin receptor-like polynucleotide with a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 3 or the complement thereof to form a test hybrid. The melting temperature of the test hybrid is compared with the melting temperature of a hybrid comprising transformylase polynucleotides having perfectly complementary nucleotide sequences, and the number or percent of basepair mismatches within the test hybrid is calculated.
Nucleotide sequences which hybridize to galanin receptor-like polynucleotides or their complements following stringent hybridization and/or wash conditions are also galanin receptor-like polynucleotides. Stringent wash conditions are well known and understood in the art and are disclosed, for example, in Sambrook et al., MOLECULAR CLONING: A LABORATORY MANUAL, 2d ed., 1989, at pages 9.50-9.51. Typically, for stringent hybridization conditions a combination of temperature and salt concentration should be chosen that is approximately 12-20°C below the calculated Tm of the hybrid under study. The Tm of a hybrid between a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:3 or the complement thereof and a polynucleotide sequence which is at least about 50, preferably about 75, 90, 96, or 98% identical to one of those nucleotide sequences can be calculated, for example, using the equation of Bolton and McCarthy, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 48, 1390 (1962):
Tm = 81.5 °C - 16.6(log10[Na+]) + 0.41(%G + C) - 0.63(%formamide) - 600/1), where / = the length of the hybrid in basepairs.
Stringent wash conditions include, for example, 4X SSC at 65°C, or 50% formamide, 4X SSC at 42°C, or 0.5X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65°C. Highly stringent wash conditions include, for example, 0.2X SSC at 65°C.
Preparation of Galanin Receptor-Like Polynucleotides
A naturally occurring galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be isolated free of other cellular components such as membrane components, proteins, and lipids. Polynucleotides can be made by a cell and isolated using standard nucleic acid purification techniques, or synthesized using an amplification technique, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or by using an automatic synthesizer. Methods for isolating polynucleotides are routine and are known in the art. Any such technique for obtaining a polynucleotide can be used to obtain isolated galanin receptor-like polynucleotides. For example, restriction enzymes and probes can be used to isolate polynucleotide fragments which comprises galanin receptor-like nucleotide sequences. Isolated polynucleotides are in preparations which are free or at least 70, 80, or 90% free of other molecules. Galanin receptor-like cDNA molecules can be made with standard molecular biology techniques, using galanin receptor-like mRNA as a template. Galanin receptor-like cDNA molecules can thereafter be replicated using molecular biology techniques known in the art and disclosed in manuals such as Sambrook et al. (1989). An amplification technique, such as PCR, can be used to obtain additional copies of polynucleotides of the invention, using either human genomic DNA or cDNA as a template.
Alternatively, synthetic chemistry techniques can be used to synthesizes galanin receptor-like polynucleotides. The degeneracy of the genetic code allows alternate nucleotide sequences to be synthesized which will encode a galanin receptor-like polypeptide having, for example, an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2 or a biologically active variant thereof.
Extending Galanin Receptor-Like Polynucleotides
Various PCR-based methods can be used to extend nucleic acid sequences encoding human galanin receptor-like GPCR to detect upstream sequences such as promoters and regulatory elements. For example, restriction-site PCR uses universal primers to retrieve unknown sequence adjacent to a known locus (Sarkar, PCR Methods Applic.
2, 318-322, 1993). Genomic DNA is first amplified in the presence of a primer to a linker sequence and a primer specific to the known region. The amplified sequences are then subjected to a second round of PCR with the same linker primer and another specific primer internal to the first one. Products of each round of PCR are trans- cribed with an appropriate RNA polymerase and sequenced using reverse transcriptase.
Inverse PCR also can be used to amplify or extend sequences using divergent primers based on a known region (Triglia et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 16, 8186, 1988). Primers can be designed using commercially available software, such as OLIGO 4.06 Primer
Analysis software (National Biosciences Inc., Plymouth, Minn.), to be 22-30 nucleotides in length, to have a GC content of 50% or more, and to anneal to the target sequence at temperatures about 68°-72° C. The method uses several restriction enzymes to generate a suitable fragment in the known region of a gene. The fragment is then circularized by intramolecular ligation and used as a PCR template.
Another method which can be used is capture PCR, which involves PCR amplification of DNA fragments adjacent to a known sequence in human and yeast artificial chromosome DNA (Lagerstrom et al., PCR Methods Applic. 1, 111-119, 1991). In this method, multiple restriction enzyme digestions and ligations also can be used to place an engineered double-stranded sequence into an unknown fragment of the DNA molecule before performing PCR.
Another method which can be used to retrieve unknown sequences is that of Parker et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 3055-3060, 1991). Additionally, PCR, nested primers, and PROMOTERFINDER libraries (CLONTECH, Palo Alto, Calif.) can be used to walk genomic DNA (CLONTECH, Palo Alto, Calif.). This process avoids the need to screen libraries and is useful in finding intron/exon junctions.
When screening for full-length cDNAs, it is preferable to use libraries that have been size-selected to include larger cDNAs. Randomly-primed libraries are preferable, in that they will contain more sequences which contain the 5' regions of genes. Use of a randomly primed library may be especially preferable for situations in which an oligo d(T) library does not yield a full-length cDNA. Genomic libraries can be useful for extension of sequence into 5' non-transcribed regulatory regions.
Commercially available capillary electrophoresis systems can be used to analyze the size or confirm the nucleotide sequence of PCR or sequencing products. For example, capillary sequencing can employ flowable polymers for electrophoretic separation, four different fluorescent dyes (one for each nucleotide) which are laser activated, and detection of the emitted wavelengths by a charge coupled device camera. Output/light intensity can be converted to electrical signal using appropriate software (e.g. GENOTYPER and Sequence NAVIGATOR, Perkin Elmer), and the entire process from loading of samples to computer analysis and elecfronic data display can be computer controlled. Capillary electrophoresis is especially preferable for the sequencing of small pieces of DNA which might be present in limited amounts in a particular sample.
Obtaining Galanin Receptor-Like Polypeptides
Galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be obtained, for example, by purification from human cells, by expression of galanin receptor-like polynucleotides, or by direct chemical synthesis.
Protein Purification
Galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be purified from any human cell which expresses the receptor, including those which have been transfected with expression constructs which express galanin receptor-like polypeptides. For example, adrenal medulla, uterus, gastrointestinal tract, dorsal root ganglia, sympathetic neurons, hypothalamus, hippocampus, amygdala, basal forebrain, brainstem nuclei, and spinal cord, including cell lines and carcinomas derived from these tissues, are useful sources of galanin receptor-like polypeptide. A purified galanin receptor-like polypeptide is separated from other compounds which normally associate with the galanin receptor-like polypeptide in the cell, such as certain proteins, carbohydrates, or lipids, using methods well-known in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to, size exclusion chromatography, ammonium sulfate fractionation, ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromoatography, and preparative gel electrophoresis.
Galanin receptor-like polypeptide is conveniently isolated as a complex with its associated G protein. A variety of galanin analogs are available and can be used as ligands for receptor binding. See the specific examples, below. A preparation of purified galanin receptor-like polypeptides is at least 80% pure; preferably, the preparations are 90%, 95%, or 99% pure. Purity of the preparations can be assessed by any means known in the art, such as SDS-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis.
Expression of Galanin Receptor-Like Polynucleotides
To express a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be inserted into an expression vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides and appropriate franscriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described, for example, in Sambrook et al. (1989) and in Ausubel et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY,
John Wiley & Sons, New York, N.Y, 1989.
A variety of expression vector/host systems can be utilized to contain and express sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. These include, but are not limited to, microorganisms, such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors, insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids), or animal cell systems.
The control elements or regulatory sequences are those non-translated regions of the vector — enhancers, promoters, 5' and 3' untranslated regions — which interact with host cellular proteins to carry out transcription and translation. Such elements can vary in their strength and specificity. Depending on the vector system and host utilized, any number of suitable transcription and translation elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, can be used. For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the BLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, LaJolla, Calif.) or pSPORTl plasmid (Life Technologies) and the like can be used. The baculovirus polyhedrin promoter can be used in insect cells. Promoters or enhancers derived from the genomes of plant cells (e.g., heat shock, RUBISCO, and storage protein genes) or from plant viruses (e.g., viral promoters or leader sequences) can be cloned into the vector. In mammalian cell systems, promoters from mammalian genes or from mammalian viruses are preferable. If it is necessary to generate a cell line that contains multiple copies of a nucleotide sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, vectors based on SV40 or EBV can be used with an appropriate selectable marker.
Bacterial and Yeast Expression Systems
In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors can be selected depending upon the use intended for the galanin receptor-like polypeptide. For example, when a large quantity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide is needed for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified can be used. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUESCRIPT
(Stratagene). In a BLUESCRIPT vector, a sequence encoding the galanin receptorlike polypeptide can be ligated into the vector in frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of β-galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced. pIN vectors (Van Heeke & Schuster, J. Biol. Chem. 264, 5503-5509, 1989) or pGEX vectors (Promega, Madison, Wis.) also can be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. Proteins made in such systems can be designed to include heparin, thrombin, or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned polypeptide of interest can be released from the GST moiety at will. In the yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae, a number of vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH can be used. For reviews, see Ausubel et al. (1989) and Grant et al., Methods Enzymol. 153, 516-544, 1987.
Plant and Insect Expression Systems
If plant expression vectors are used, the expression of sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be driven by any of a number of promoters. For example, viral promoters such as the 35S and 19S promoters of CaMV can be used alone or in combination with the omega leader sequence from TMV (Takamatsu
EMBO J. 6, 307-311, 1987). Alternatively, plant promoters such as the small subunit of RUBISCO or heat shock promoters can be used (Coruzzi et al, EMBO J. 3, 1671-1680, 1984; Broglie et al, Science 224, 838-843, 1984; Winter et al, Results
Probl. Cell Differ. 17, 85-105, 1991). These constructs can be introduced into plant cells by direct DNA transformation or by pathogen-mediated fransfection. Such techniques are described in a number of generally available reviews (e.g., Hobbs or
Muπy, in MCGRAW HILL YEARBOOK OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, McGraw Hill, New York, N.Y., pp. 191-196, 1992).
An insect system also can be used to express a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. For example, in one such system Autographa califo nica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera frugiperda cells or in Trichoplusia larvae. Sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be cloned into a non-essential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter. Successful insertion of galanin receptor-like polypeptides will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein. The recombinant viruses can then be used to infect S. frugiperda cells or Trichoplusia larvae in which galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be expressed (Engelhard et al, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 91, 3224-3227, 1994).
Mammalian Expression Systems
A number of viral-based expression systems can be used to express galanin receptorlike polypeptides in mammalian host cells. For example, if an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex comprising the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a non-essential El or E3 region of the viral genome can be used to obtain a viable virus which is capable of expressing a galanin receptor-like polypeptide in infected host cells (Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81, 3655-3659, 1984). If desired, transcription enhancers, such as the Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) enhancer, can be used to increase expression in mammalian host cells.
Human artificial chromosomes (HACs) also can be used to deliver larger fragments of DNA than can be contained and expressed in a plasmid. HACs of 6M to 10M are constructed and delivered to cells via conventional delivery methods (e.g., liposomes, polycationic amino polymers, or vesicles).
Specific initiation signals also can be used to achieve more efficient translation of sequences encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides. Such signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, its initiation codon, and upstream sequences are inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional transcriptional or translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only coding sequence, or a fragment thereof, is inserted, exogenous translational control signals (including the ATG initiation codon) should be provided. The initiation codon should be in the coπect reading frame to ensure translation of the entire insert.
Exogenous translational elements and initiation codons can be of various origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression can be enhanced by the inclusion of enhancers which are appropriate for the particular cell system which is used (see Sc axi et al, Results Probl. Cell Differ. 20, 125-162, 1994).
Host Cells
A host cell strain can be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed galanin receptor-like polypeptide in the desired fashion. Such modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation. Post-translational processing which cleaves a "prepro" form of the polypeptide also can be used to facilitate coπect insertion, folding and/or function. Different host cells which have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for post-translational activities (e.g., CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and WI38), are available from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC; 10801
University Boulevard, Manassas, VA 20110-2209) and can be chosen to ensure the coπect modification and processing of the foreign protein.
Stable expression is prefeπed for long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins. For example, cell lines which stably express galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be transformed using expression vectors which can contain viral origins of replication and/or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene on the same or on a separate vector. Following the introduction of the vector, cells can be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched medium before they are switched to a selective medium. The purpose of the selectable marker is to confer resistance to selection, and its presence allows growth and recovery of cells which successfully express the introduced galanin receptor-like sequences. Resistant clones of stably transformed cells can be proliferated using tissue culture techniques appropriate to the cell type. See, for example, ANIMAL CELL CULTURE, R.I. Freshney, ed., 1986. Any number of selection systems can be used to recover transformed cell lines.
These include, but are not limited to, the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al, Cell 11, 223-32, 1977) and adenine phosphoribosylfransferase (Lowy et al, Cell 22, 817-23, 1980) genes which can be employed in tk' or aprf cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite, antibiotic, or herbicide resistance can be used as the basis for selection. For example, dhfr confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 77, 3567-70, 1980) npt confers resistance to the aminoglycosides, neomycin and G-418 (Colbere-Garapin et al, J. Mol. Biol. 150, 1-14, 1981), and als and pat confer resistance to chlorsulfuron and phosphinotricin acetyltransferase, respectively (Murry, 1992, supra). Additional selectable genes have been described. For example, trpB allows cells to utilize indole in place of tryptophan, or hisD, which allows cells to utilize histinol in place of histidine (Hartman & Mulligan, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 85, 8047-51, 1988). Visible markers such as anthocyanins, β-glucuronidase and its substrate GUS, and luciferase and its subsfrate luciferin, can be used to identify transformants and to quantify the amount of transient or stable protein expression attributable to a specific vector system (Rhodes et al, Methods Mol. Biol. 55, 121-131, 1995).
Detecting Expression of Galanin Receptor-Like Polypeptides
Although the presence of marker gene expression suggests that the galanin receptorlike polynucleotide is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed. For example, if a sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, transformed cells containing sequences which encode a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be identified by the absence of marker gene function. Alternatively, a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the galanin receptor-like polynucleotide. Alternatively, host cells which contain a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide and which express a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. These procedures include, but are not limited to, DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridizations and protein bioassay or immunoassay techniques which include membrane, solution, or chip-based technologies for the detection and/or quantification of nucleic acid or protein. For example, the presence of a polynucleotide sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be detected by DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridization or amplification using probes or fragments or fragments of polynucleotides encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. Nucleic acid amplification-based assays involve the use of oligonucleotides selected from sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide to detect transformants which contain a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide.
A variety of protocols for detecting and measuring the expression of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, using either polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies specific for the polypeptide, are known in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immuno- sorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). A two-site, monoclonal-based immunoassay using monoclonal antibodies reactive to two non-interfering epitopes on a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be used, or a competitive binding assay can be employed. These and other assays are described in Hampton et al, SEROLOGICAL METHODS: A LABORATORY MANUAL, APS Press, St. Paul, Minn., 1990) and Maddox et al, J. Exp. Med 755, 1211-1216, 1983).
A wide variety of labels and conjugation techniques are known by those skilled in the art and can be used in various nucleic acid and amino acid assays. Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides encoding galanin receptor-like polypeptides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling, or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide.
Alternatively, sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe. Such vectors are known in the art, are commercially available, and can be used to synthesize RNA probes in yitro by addition of labeled nucleotides and an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6. These procedures can be conducted using a variety of commercially available kits (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Promega, and US Biochemical).
Suitable reporter molecules or labels which can be used for ease of detection include radionuclides, enzymes, and fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents, as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like.
Expression and Purification of Galanin Receptor-Like Polypeptides
Host cells transformed with nucleotide sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture. The polypeptide produced by a transformed cell can be secreted or contained infracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used. As will be understood by those of skill in the art, expression vectors containing polynucleotides which encode galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of soluble galanin receptor-like polypeptides through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane or which direct the membrane insertion of membrane-bound galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
As discussed above, other constructions can be used to join a sequence encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide to a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide domain which will facilitate purification of soluble proteins. Such purification facilitating domains include, but are not limited to, metal chelating peptides such as histidine-tryptophan modules that allow purification on immobilized metals, protein A domains that allow purification on immobilized immunoglobulin, and the domain utilized in the FLAGS extension/affinity purification system (Immunex Corp., Seattle, Wash.). Inclusion of cleavable linker sequences such as those specific for Factor XA or enterokinase (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) between the purification domain and the galanin receptor-like polypeptide also can be used to facilitate purification. One such expression vector provides for expression of a fusion protein containing a galanin receptor-like polypeptide and 6 histidine residues preceding a thioredoxin or an enterokinase cleavage site. The histidine residues facilitate purification by BVIAC (immobilized metal ion affinity chromatography, as described in Porath et al, Prot. Exp. Purif. 3, 263-281, 1992), while the enterokinase cleavage site provides a means for purifying the galanin receptor-like polypeptide from the fusion protein. Vectors which contain fusion proteins are disclosed in Rroll et al, DNA Cell Biol. 12, 441-453, 1993.
Chemical Synthesis
Sequences encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see Caruthers et al, Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 215-223, 1980; Horn et al. Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 225-232, 1980). Alternatively, a galanin receptor-like polypeptide itself can be produced using chemical methods to synthesize its amino acid sequence, such as by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149-2154, 1963; Roberge et al, Science 269, 202-204, 1995). Protein synthesis can be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis can be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431 A Peptide Synthesizer
(Perkin Elmer). Optionally, fragments of galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be separately synthesized and combined using chemical methods to produce a full- length molecule.
The newly synthesized peptide can be substantially purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (e.g., Creighton, PROTEINS: STRUCTURES AND MOLECULAR PRINCIPLES, WH Freeman and Co., New York, N.Y, 1983). The composition of a synthetic galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing (e.g., the Edman degradation procedure; see Creighton, supra). Additionally, any portion of the amino acid sequence of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be altered during direct synthesis and/or combined using chemical methods with sequences from other proteins to produce a variant polypeptide or a fusion protein.
Production of Altered Galanin Receptor-Like Polypeptides
As will be understood by those of skill in the art, it may be advantageous to produce galanin receptor-like polypeptide-encoding nucleotide sequences possessing non-naturally occurring codons. For example, codons prefeπed by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce an RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence.
The nucleotide sequences disclosed herein can be engineered using methods generally known in the art to alter galanin receptor-like polypeptide-encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the polypeptide or mRNA product. DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides can be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences. For example, site-directed mutagenesis can be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, introduce mutations, and so forth.
Antibodies
Any type of antibody known in the art can be generated to bind specifically to an epitope of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. "Antibody" as used herein includes intact immunoglobulin molecules, as well as fragments thereof, such as Fab, F(ab')2, and Fv, which are capable of binding an epitope of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. Typically, at least 6, 8, 10, or 12 contiguous amino acids are required to form an epitope. However, epitopes which involve non-contiguous amino acids may require more, e.g., at least 15, 25, or 50 amino acids.
An antibody which specifically binds to an epitope of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be used therapeutically, as well as in immunochemical assays, such as Western blots, ELISAs, radioimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art. Various immunoassays can be used to identify antibodies having the desired specificity. Numerous protocols for competitive binding or immunoradiometric assays are well known in the art. Such immunoassays typically involve the measurement of complex formation between an immunogen and an antibody which specifically binds to the immunogen.
Typically, an antibody which specifically binds to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide provides a detection signal at least 5-, 10-, or 20-fold higher than a detection signal provided with other proteins when used in an immunochemical assay. Preferably, antibodies which specifically bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides do not detect other proteins in immunochemical assays and can immunoprecipitate a galanin receptor-like polypeptide from solution.
Galanin receptor-like polypeptides can be used to immunize a mammal, such as a mouse, rat, rabbit, guinea pig, monkey, or human, to produce polyclonal antibodies. If desired, a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be conjugated to a carrier protein, such as bovine serum albumin, thyroglobulin, and keyhole limpet hemocyanin. Depending on the host species, various adjuvants can be used to increase the immunological response. Such adjuvants include, but are not limited to, Freund's adjuvant, mineral gels (e.g., aluminum hydroxide), and surface active substances (e.g. lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, and dinitrophenol). Among adjuvants used in humans, BCG (bacilli Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum are especially useful. Monoclonal antibodies which specifically bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be prepared using any technique which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These techniques include, but are not limited to, the hybridoma technique, the human B-cell hybridoma technique, and the EBV-hybridoma technique (Kohler et al, Nature 256, 495-497, 1985; Kozbor et al,
J. Immunol. Methods 81, 31-42, 1985; Cote et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 80, 2026-2030, 1983; Cole et al, Mol. Cell Biol. 62, 109-120, 1984).
In addition, techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies," he splicing of mouse antibody genes to human antibody genes to obtain a molecule with appropriate antigen specificity and biological activity, can be used (Morrison et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 81, 6851-6855, 1984; Neuberger et al, Nature 312, 604-608, 1984; Takeda et al, Nature 314, 452-454, 1985). Monoclonal and other antibodies also can be "humanized" to prevent a patient from mounting an immune response against the antibody when it is used therapeutically. Such antibodies may be sufficiently similar in sequence to human antibodies to be used directly in therapy or may require alteration of a few key residues. Sequence differences between rodent antibodies and human sequences can be minimized by replacing residues which differ from those in the human sequences by site directed mutagenesis of individual residues or by grating of entire complementarity determining regions. Alternatively, humanized antibodies can be produced using recombinant methods, as described in GB2188638B. Antibodies which specifically bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can contain antigen binding sites which are either partially or fully humanized, as disclosed in U.S. 5,565,332.
Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies can be adapted using methods known in the art to produce single chain antibodies which specifically bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides. Antibodies with related specificity, but of distinct idiotypic composition, can be generated by chain shuffling from random combinatorial immunoglobin libraries (Burton, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
88, 11 120-23, 1991). S ingle-chain antibodies also can be constructed using a DNA amplification method, such as PCR, using hybridoma cDNA as a template (Thirion et al, 1996, Eur. J. Cancer Prey. 5, 507-11). Single-chain antibodies can be mono- or bispecific, and can be bivalent or tetravalent. Construction of tefravalent, bispecific single-chain antibodies is taught, for example, in Coloma & Morrison, 1997, Nat. Biotechnol. 15, 159-63. Construction of bivalent, bispecific single-chain antibodies is taught in Mallender & Voss, 1994, J Biol. Chem. 269, 199-206.
A nucleotide sequence encoding a single-chain antibody can be constructed using manual or automated nucleotide synthesis, cloned into an expression construct using standard recombinant DNA methods, and introduced into a cell to express the coding sequence, as described below. Alternatively, single-chain antibodies can be produced directly using, for example, filamentous phage technology (Verhaar et al, 1995, Int. J. Cancer 61, 497-501; Nicholls et al, 1993, J. Immunol. Meth. 165, 81-
91).
Antibodies which specifically bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides also can be produced by inducing in vivo production in the lymphocyte population or by screening immunoglobulin libraries or panels of highly specific binding reagents as disclosed in the literature (Orlandi et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 86, 3833-3837, 1989; Winter et al, Nature 349, 293-299, 1991).
Other types of antibodies can be constructed and used therapeutically in methods of the invention. For example, chimeric antibodies can be constructed as disclosed in
WO 93/03151. Binding proteins which are derived from immunoglobulins and which are multivalent and multispecific, such as the "diabodies" described in WO 94/13804, also can be prepared.
Antibodies according to the invention can be purified by methods well known in the art. For example, antibodies can be affinity purified by passage over a column to which a galanin receptor-like polypeptide is bound. The bound antibodies can then be eluted from the column using a buffer with a high salt concentration.
Antisense Oligonucleotides
Antisense oligonucleotides are nucleotide sequences which are complementary to a specific DNA or RNA sequence. Once introduced into a cell, the complementary nucleotides combine with natural sequences produced by the cell to form complexes and block either transcription or translation. Preferably, an antisense oligonucleotide is at least 11 nucleotides in length, but can be at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides long. Longer sequences also can be used. Antisense oligonucleotide molecules can be provided in a DNA construct and introduced into a cell as described above to decrease the level of galanin receptor-like GPCR gene products in the cell.
Antisense oligonucleotides can be deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides, or a combination of both. Oligonucleotides can be synthesized manually or by an automated synthesizer, by covalently linking the 5' end of one nucleotide with the 3' end of another nucleotide with non-phosphodiester internucleotide linkages such alkylphosphonates, phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, alkylphosphonothioates, alkylphosphonates, phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, carbamates, acetamidate, carboxymethyl esters, carbonates, and phosphate triesters. See Brown, Meth. Mol. Biol. 20, 1-8, 1994; Sonveaux, Meth. Mol. Biol. 26, 1-72, 1994; Uhlmann et al, Chem. Rev. 90, 543-583, 1990.
Modifications of galanin receptor-like GPCR gene expression can be obtained by designing antisense oligonucleotides which will form duplexes to the control, 5', or regulatory regions of the galanin receptor-like GPCR gene. Oligonucleotides derived from the transcription initiation site, e.g., between positions -10 and +10 from the start site, are prefeπed. Similarly, inhibition can be achieved using "triple helix" base-pairing methodology. Triple helix pairing is useful because it causes inhibition of the ability of the double helix to open sufficiently for the binding of polymerases, transcription factors, or chaperons. Therapeutic advances using triplex DNA have been described in the literature (e.g., Gee et al, in Huber & Can, MOLECULAR AND IMMUNOLOGIC APPROACHES, Futura Publishing Co., Mt. Kisco, N.Y., 1994). An antisense oligonucleotide also can be designed to block translation of mRNA by preventing the transcript from binding to ribosomes.
Precise complementarity is not required for successful complex formation between an antisense oligonucleotide and the complementary sequence of a galanin receptor- like polynucleotide. Antisense oligonucleotides which comprise, for example, 2, 3,
4, or 5 or more stretches of contiguous nucleotides which are precisely complementary to a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide, each separated by a stretch of contiguous nucleotides which are not complementary to adjacent galanin receptorlike GPCR nucleotides, can provide sufficient targeting specificity for galanin receptor-like GPCR mRNA. Preferably, each stretch of complementary contiguous nucleotides is at least 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 or more nucleotides in length. Non- complementary intervening sequences are preferably 1, 2, 3, or 4 nucleotides in length. One skilled in the art can easily use the calculated melting point of an antisense-sense pair to determine the degree of mismatching which will be tolerated between a particular antisense oligonucleotide and a particular galanin receptor-like polynucleotide sequence.
Antisense oligonucleotides can be modified without affecting their ability to hybridize to a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide. These modifications can be internal or at one or both ends of the antisense molecule. For example, inter- nucleoside phosphate linkages can be modified by adding cholesteryl or diamine moieties with varying numbers of carbon residues between the amino groups and terminal ribose. Modified bases and/or sugars, such as arabinose instead of ribose, or a 3', 5 '-substituted oligonucleotide in which the 3' hydroxyl group or the 5' phosphate group are substituted, also can be employed in a modified antisense oligonucleotide.
These modified oligonucleotides can be prepared by methods well known in the art. See, e.g., Agrawal et al, Trends Biotechnol. 10, 152-158, 1992; Uhlmann et al, Chem. Rev. 90, 543-584, 1990; Uhlmann et al, Tetrahedron. Lett. 215, 3539-3542, 1987.
Ribozymes
Ribozymes are RNA molecules with catalytic activity. See, e.g., Cech, Science 236, 1532-1539; 1987; Cech, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 59, 543-568; 1990, Cech, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 2, 605-609; 1992, Couture & Stinchcomb, Trends Genet. 12, 510-515, 1996. Ribozymes can be used to inhibit gene function by cleaving an RNA sequence, as is known in the art (e.g., Haseloff et al, U.S. Patent 5,641,673). The mechanism of ribozyme action involves sequence-specific hybridization of the ribozyme molecule to complementary target RNA, followed by endonucleolytic cleavage. Examples include engineered hammerhead motif ribozyme molecules that can specifically and efficiently catalyze endonucleolytic cleavage of specific nucleotide sequences.
The coding sequence of a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be used to generate ribozymes which will specifically bind to mRNA transcribed from the galanin receptor-like polynucleotide. Methods of designing and constructing ribozymes which can cleave other RNA molecules in trans in a highly sequence specific manner have been developed and described in the art (.see Haseloff et al. Nature 334, 585-591, 1988). For example, the cleavage activity of ribozymes can be targeted to specific RNAs by engineering a discrete "hybridization" region into the ribozyme. The hybridization region contains a sequence complementary to the target
RNA and thus specifically hybridizes with the target (see, for example, Gerlach et α/., EP 321,201).
Specific ribozyme cleavage sites within a galanin receptor-like GPCR RNA target can be identified by scanning the target molecule for ribozyme cleavage sites which include the following sequences: GUA, GUU, and GUC. Once identified, short RNA sequences of between 15 and 20 ribonucleotides coπesponding to the region of the target RNA containing the cleavage site can be evaluated for secondary structural features which may render the target inoperable. Suitability of candidate galanin receptor-like GPCR RNA targets also can be evaluated by testing accessibility to hybridization with complementary oligonucleotides using ribonuclease protection assays. The nucleotide sequences shown in SEQ ID NO:3 and its complement provide sources of suitable hybridization region sequences. Longer complementary sequences can be used to increase the affinity of the hybridization sequence for the target. The hybridizing and cleavage regions of the ribozyme can be integrally related such that upon hybridizing to the target RNA through the complementary regions, the catalytic region of the ribozyme can cleave the target.
Ribozymes can be introduced into cells as part of a DNA construct. Mechanical methods, such as microinjection, liposome-mediated transfection, electroporation, or calcium phosphate precipitation, can be used to introduce a ribozyme-containing
DNA construct into cells in which it is desired to decrease galanin receptor-like GPCR expression. Alternatively, if it is desired that the cells stably retain the DNA construct, the construct can be supplied on a plasmid and maintained as a separate element or integrated into the genome of the cells, as is known in the art. A ribozyme-encoding DNA construct can include transcriptional regulatory elements, such as a promoter element, an enhancer or UAS element, and a transcriptional terminator signal, for controlling transcription of ribozymes in the cells.
As taught in Haseloff et al, U.S. Patent 5,641,673, ribozymes can be engineered so that ribozyme expression will occur in response to factors which induce expression of a target gene. Ribozymes also can be engineered to provide an additional level of regulation, so that destruction of mRNA occurs only when both a ribozyme and a target gene are induced in the cells. Differentially Expressed Genes
Described herein are methods for the identification of genes whose products interact with human galanin receptor-like GPCR . Such genes may represent genes that are differentially expressed in disorders including, but not limited to, diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular disease, and neurological diseases. Further, such genes may represent genes that are differentially regulated in response to manipulations relevant to the progression or treatment of such diseases. Additionally, such genes may have a temporally modulated expression, increased or decreased at different stages of tissue or organism development. A differentially expressed gene may also have its expression modulated under control versus experimental conditions. In addition, the galanin receptor-like GPCR gene or gene product may itself be tested for differential expression.
The degree to which expression differs in a normal versus a diseased state need only be large enough to be visualized via standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques. Other such standard characterization techniques by which expression differences may be visualized include but are not limited to, quantitative RT (reverse transcriptase), PCR, and Northern analysis.
Identification of Differentially Expressed Genes
To identify differentially expressed genes total RNA or, preferably, mRNA is isolated from tissues of interest. For example, RNA samples are obtained from tissues of experimental subjects and from coπesponding tissues of control subjects.
Any RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA may be utilized for the purification of such RNA samples. See, for example, Ausubel et al, ed., CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, 1987-1993. Large numbers of tissue samples may readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski, U.S. Patent 4,843,155. Transcripts within the collected RNA samples that represent RNA produced by differentially expressed genes are identified by methods well known to those of skill in the art. They include, for example, differential screening (Tedder et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85, 208-12, 1988), subfractive hybridization (Hedrick et al,
Nature 308, 149-53; Lee et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 2825, 1984), and, preferably, differential display (Liang & Pardee, Science 257, 967-71, 1992; U.S. Patent 5,262,311).
The differential expression information may itself suggest relevant methods for the treatment of disorders involving the human galanin receptor-like GPCR. For example, treatment may include a modulation of expression of the differentially expressed genes and or the gene encoding the human somatostatin receptor-like protein. The differential expression information may indicate whether the expression or activity of the differentially expressed gene or gene product or the human somatostatin receptor-like protein gene or gene product are up-regulated or down- regulated.
Screening Methods
The invention provides methods for identifying modulators, i.e., candidate or test compounds which bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides or polynucleotides and/or have a stimulatory or inhibitory effect on, for example, expression or activity of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide or polynucleotide, so as to increase or decrease signal transduction mediated by the receptor.
The invention provides assays for screening test compounds which bind to or modulate the activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide. A test compound preferably binds to a galanin receptor-like poly- peptide or polynucleotide. More preferably, a test compound decreases or increases a galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or expression of a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% relative to the absence of the test compound.
Test Compounds
Test compounds can be pharmacologic agents already known in the art or can be compounds previously unknown to have any pharmacological activity. The compounds can be naturally occurring or designed in the laboratory. They can be isolated from microorganisms, animals, or plants, and can be produced recombinantly, or synthesized by chemical methods known in the art. If desired, test compounds can be obtained using any of the numerous combinatorial library methods known in the art, including but not limited to, biological libraries, spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries, synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution, the "one-bead one-compound" library method, and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library approach is limited to polypeptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to polypeptide, non-peptide oligomer, or small molecule libraries of compounds. See Lam, Anticancer Drug Des. 12, 145, 1997.
Methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries are well known in the art (see, for example, DeWitt et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90, 6909, 1993; Erb et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91, 11422, 1994; Zuckermann et al, J. Med. Chem. 37, 2678, 1994; Cho et al, Science 261, 1303, 1993; Carell et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl 33, 2059, 1994; Carell et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33, 2061; Gallop et al, J.
Med. Chem. 37, 1233, 1994). Libraries of compounds can be presented in solution (see, e.g., Houghten, Biotechniques 13, 412-421, 1992), or on beads (Lam, Nature 354, 82-84, 1991), chips (Fodor, Nature 364, 555-556, 1993), bacteria or spores (Ladner, U.S. Patent 5,223,409), plasmids (Cull et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89, 1865-1869, 1992), or phage (Scott & Smith, Science 249, 386-390, 1990; Devlin, Science 249, 404-406, 1990); Cwirla et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97, 6378-6382, 1990; Felici, J Mol. Biol. 222, 301-310, 1991; and Ladner, U.S. Patent 5,223,409).
High Throughput Screening
Test compounds can be screened for the ability to bind to galanin receptor-like polypeptides or polynucleotides or to affect galanin receptor-like GPCR activity or galanin receptor-like GPCR gene expression using high throughput screening. Using high throughput screening, many discrete compounds can be tested in parallel so that large numbers of test compounds can be quickly screened. The most widely established techniques utilize 96-well microtiter plates. The wells of the microtiter plates typically require assay volumes that range from 50 to 500 μl. In addition to the plates, many instruments, materials, pipettors, robotics, plate washers, and plate readers are commercially available to fit the 96-well format.
Alternatively, "free format assays," or assays that have no physical barrier between samples, can be used. For example, an assay using pigment cells (melanocytes) in a simple homogeneous assay for combinatorial peptide libraries is described by Jayawickreme et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 19, 1614-18 (1994). The cells are placed under agarose in petri dishes, then beads that carry combinatorial compounds are placed on the surface of the agarose. The combinatorial compounds are partially released the compounds from the beads. Active compounds can be visualized as dark pigment areas because, as the compounds diffuse locally into the gel matrix, the active compounds cause the cells to change colors.
Another example of a free format assay is described by Chelsky, "Strategies for Screening Combinatorial Libraries: Novel and Traditional Approaches," reported at the First Annual Conference of The Society for Biomolecular Screening in Philadephia, Pa. (Nov. 7-10, 1995). Chelsky placed a simple homogenous enzyme assay for carbonic anhydrase inside an agarose gel such that the enzyme in the gel would cause a color change throughout the gel. Thereafter, beads carrying com- binatorial compounds via a photolinker were placed inside the gel and the compounds were partially released by UV-light. Compounds that inhibited the enzyme were observed as local zones of inhibition having less color change.
Yet another example is described by Salmon et al, Molecular Diversity 2, 57-63
(1996). In this example, combinatorial libraries were screened for compounds that had cytotoxic effects on cancer cells growing in agar.
Another high throughput screening method is described in Beutel et al, U.S. Patent 5,976,813. In this method, test samples are placed in a porous matrix. One or more assay components are then placed within, on top of, or at the bottom of a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support. When samples are introduced to the porous matrix they diffuse sufficiently slowly, such that the assays can be performed without the test samples running together.
Binding Assays
For binding assays, the test compound is preferably a small molecule which binds to and occupies the active site of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide, thereby making the ligand binding site inaccessible to substrate such that normal biological activity is prevented. Examples of such small molecules include, but are not limited to, small peptides or peptide-like molecules. Potential ligands which bind to a polypeptide of the invention include, but are not limited to, the natural ligands of known galanin receptor-like GPCRs and analogues or derivatives thereof.
In binding assays, either the test compound or the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can comprise a detectable label, such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase. Detection of a test compound which is bound to the galanin receptor-like polypeptide can then be accomplished, for example, by direct counting of radioemmission, by scintillation counting, or by determining conversion of an appropriate substrate to a detectable product.
Alternatively, binding of a test compound to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be determined without labeling either of the interactants. For example, a micro- physiometer can be used to detect binding of a test compound with a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. A microphysiometer (e.g., Cytosensor™) is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a light-addressable potentiometric sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between a test compound and a galanin receptor-like polypeptide (McConnell et al, Science 257, 1906-1912, 1992).
Determining the ability of a test compound to bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide also can be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Bimolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (Sjolander & Urbaniczky, Anal. Chem. 63,
2338-2345, 1991, and Szabo et al, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5, 699-705, 1995). BIA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore™). Changes in the optical phenomenon surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
In yet another aspect of the invention, a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be used as a "bait protein" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,283,317; Zervos et al, Cell 72, 223-232, 1993; Madura et al, J. Biol. Chem. 268, 12046-12054, 1993; Bartel et al, Biotechniques 14, 920-924, 1993; Iwabuchi et al,
Oncogene 8, 1693-1696, 1993; and Brent W094/10300), to identify other proteins which bind to or interact with the galanin receptor-like polypeptide and modulate its activity.
The two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains. Briefly, the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs. For example, in one construct, polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g. , GAL-4). In the other construct a DNA sequence that encodes an unidentified protein ("prey" or "sample") can be fused to a polynucleotide that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait" and the "prey" proteins are able to interact in vivo to form an protein-dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ), which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor.
Expression of the reporter gene can be detected, and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the DNA sequence encoding the protein which interacts with the galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
It may be desirable to immobilize either the galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound to facilitate separation of bound from unbound forms of one or both of the interactants, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay. Thus, either the galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound can be bound to a solid support. Suitable solid supports include, but are not limited to, glass or plastic slides, tissue culture plates, microtiter wells, tubes, silicon chips, or particles such as beads (including, but not limited to, latex, polystyrene, or glass beads). Any method known in the art can be used to attach the galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound to a solid support, including use of covalent and non-covalent linkages, passive absorption, or pairs of binding moieties attached respectively to the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound and the solid support. Test compounds are preferably bound to the solid support in an aπay, so that the location of individual test compounds can be tracked. Binding of a test compound to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants. Examples of such vessels include microtiter plates, test tubes, and microcentrifuge tubes. In one embodiment, the galanin receptor-like polypeptide is a fusion protein comprising a domain that allows the galanin receptor-like polypeptide to be bound to a solid support. For example, glutathione-S-transferase fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtiter plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and the non-adsorbed galanin receptor-like polypeptide; the mixture is then incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads or microtiter plate wells are washed to remove any unbound components.
Binding of the interactants can be determined either directly or indirectly, as described above. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the solid support before binding is determined.
Other techniques for immobilizing proteins or polynucleotides on a solid support also can be used in the screening assays of the invention. For example, either a galanin receptor-like polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or a test compound can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin. Biotinylated galanin receptor-like polypeptides (or polynucleotides) or test compounds can be prepared from biotin-NHS(N-hydroxysuccinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, 111.) and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). Alternatively, antibodies which specifically bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, polynucleotide, or a test compound, but which do not interfere with a desired binding site, such as the active site of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide, can be derivatized to the wells of the plate. Unbound target or protein can be trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation.
Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the
GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies which specifically bind to the galanin receptor-like polypeptide or test compound, enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an activity of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide, and SDS gel electrophoresis under non-reducing conditions.
Screening for test compounds which bind to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or polynucleotide also can be carried out in an intact cell. Any cell which comprises a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system. A galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Binding of the test compound to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or polynucleotide is determined as described above.
Galanin Receptor-Like GPCR Assays
Test compounds can be tested for the ability to increase or decrease a galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. Galanin receptorlike GPCR activity can be measured, for example, using methods described in the specific examples, below. Galanin receptor-like GPCR activity can be measured after contacting either a purified galanin receptor-like polypeptide, a cell membrane preparation, or an intact cell with a test compound. A test compound which decreases galanin receptor-like GPCR activity by at least about 10, preferably about
50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential agent for decreasing galanin receptor-like GPCR activity. A test compound which increases galanin receptor-like GPCR activity by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential agent for increasing galanin receptor-like GPCR activity.
One such screening procedure involves the use of melanophores which are transfected to express a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. Such a screening technique is described in PCT WO 92/01810 published Feb. 6, 1992. Thus, for example, such an assay may be employed for screening for a compound which inhibits activation of the receptor polypeptide of the present invention by contacting the melanophore cells which encode the receptor with both the receptor ligand and a compound to be screened. Inhibition of the signal generated by the ligand indicates that a compound is a potential antagonist for the receptor, i.e., inhibits activation of the receptor. The screen may be employed for identifying a compound which activates the receptor by contacting such cells with compounds to be screened and determining whether each compound generates a signal, i.e., activates the receptor.
Other screening techniques include the use of cells which express galanin receptorlike polypeptide (for example, transfected CHO cells) in a system which measures extracellular pH changes caused by receptor activation (see, e.g., Science 246,
181-296 (1989)). For example, compounds may be contacted with a cell which expresses the receptor polypeptide of the present invention and a second messenger response, e.g., signal fransduction or pH changes, can be measured to determine whether the potential compound activates or inhibits the receptor.
Another such screening technique involves introducing RNA encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide into Xenopus oocytes to transiently express the receptor. The receptor oocytes can then be contacted with the receptor ligand and a compound to be screened, followed by detection of inhibition or activation of a calcium signal in the case of screening for compounds which are thought to inhibit activation of the receptor.
Another screening technique involves expressing a galanin receptor-like polypeptide in cells in which the receptor is linked to a phospholipase C or D. Such cells include endothelial cells, smooth muscle cells, embryonic kidney cells, etc. The screening may be accomplished as described above by quantifying the degree of activation of the receptor from changes in the phospholipase activity. Galanin Receptor-Like Gene Expression
In another embodiment, test compounds which increase or decrease galanin receptorlike GPCR gene expression are identified. A galanin receptor-like polynucleotide is contacted with a test compound, and the expression of an RNA or polypeptide product of the galanin receptor-like polynucleotide is determined. The level of expression of appropriate mRNA or polypeptide in the presence of the test compound is compared to the level of expression of mRNA or polypeptide in the absence of the test compound. The test compound can then be identified as a modulator of expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of mRNA or polypeptide is greater in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as a stimulator or enhancer of the mRNA or polypeptide expression. Alternatively, when expression of the mRNA or polypeptide is less in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of the mRNA or polypeptide expression.
The level of galanin receptor-like GPCR mRNA or polypeptide expression in the cells can be determined by methods well known in the art for detecting mRNA or polypeptide. Either qualitative or quantitative methods can be used. The presence of polypeptide products of a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be determined, for example, using a variety of techniques known in the art, including immunochemical methods such as radioimmunoassay, Western blotting, and immunohistochemistry. Alternatively, polypeptide synthesis can be determined in vivo, in a cell culture, or in an in vitro translation system by detecting incorporation of labeled amino acids into a galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
Such screening can be carried out either in a cell-free assay system or in an intact cell. Any cell which expresses a galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system. The galanin receptor-like polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Either a primary culture or an established cell line can be used. Pharmaceutical Compositions
The invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions which can be administered to a patient to achieve a therapeutic effect. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can comprise, for example, a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, galanin receptor-like polynucleotide, antibodies which specifically bind to a galanin receptorlike polypeptide, or mimetics, agonists, antagonists, or inhibitors of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide activity. The compositions can be administered alone or in combination with at least one other agent, such as stabilizing compound, which can be administered in any sterile, biocompatible phannaceutical carrier, including, but not limited to, saline, buffered saline, dextrose, and water. The compositions can be administered to a patient alone, or in combination with other agents, drugs or hormones.
In addition to the active ingredients, these pharmaceutical compositions can contain suitable pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries which facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered by any number of routes including, but not limited to, oral, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, inframedullary, infrathecal, infraventricular, transdermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, parenteral, topical, sublingual, or rectal means. Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration can be formulated using pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art in dosages suitable for oral administration. Such carriers enable the pharmaceutical compositions to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, and the like, for ingestion by the patient.
Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained through combination of active compounds with solid excipient, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Suitable excipients are carbohydrate or protein fillers, such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose, such as methyl cellulose, hydroxy- propylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; gums including arabic and fragacanth; and proteins such as gelatin and collagen. If desired, disintegrating or solubilizing agents can be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyπolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
Dragee cores can be used in conjunction with suitable coatings, such as concenfrated sugar solutions, which also can contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyπolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and/or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for product identification or to characterize the quantity of active compound, i.e., dosage.
Pharmaceutical preparations which can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a coating, such as glycerol or sorbitol. Push-fit capsules can contain active ingredients mixed with a filler or binders, such as lactose or starches, lubricants, such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds can be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid, or liquid polyethylene glycol with or without stabilizers.
Pharmaceutical formulations suitable for parenteral administration can be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiologically buffered saline. Aqueous injection suspensions can contain substances which increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran. Additionally, suspensions of the active compounds can be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Non-lipid polycationic amino polymers also can be used for delivery. Optionally, the suspension also can contain suitable stabilizers or agents which increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concenfrated solutions. For topical or nasal administration, penetrants appropriate to the particular barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be manufactured in a manner that is known in the art, e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping, or lyophilizing processes. The pharmaceutical composition can be provided as a salt and can be formed with many acids, including but not limited to, hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the coπesponding free base forms. In other cases, the prefened preparation can be a lyophilized powder which can contain any or all of the following: 1-50 mM histidine, 0.1%-2% sucrose, and 2-7% mannitol, at a pH range of 4.5 to 5.5, that is combined with buffer prior to use.
Further details on techniques for formulation and administration can be found in the latest edition of REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES (Maack Publishing Co.,
Easton, Pa.). After pharmaceutical compositions have been prepared, they can be placed in an appropriate container and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition. Such labeling would include amount, frequency, and method of administration.
Diagnostic and Therapeutic Indications and Methods
G-protein coupled receptors are ubiquitous in the mammalian host and are responsible for many biological functions, including many pathologies. Accordingly, it is desirable to find compounds and drugs which stimulate a G-protein coupled receptor on the one hand and which can inhibit the function of a G-protein coupled receptor on the other hand. For example, compounds which activate the G-protein coupled receptor may be employed for therapeutic purposes, such as the freatment of asthma, Parkinson's disease, acute heart failure, urinary retention, and osteoporosis. In particular, compounds which activate the receptors of the present invention are useful in treating various cardiovascular ailments such as caused by the lack of pulmonary blood flow or hypertension. In addition these compounds may also be used in treating various physiological disorders relating to abnormal control of fluid and electrolyte homeostasis and in diseases associated with abnormal angiotensin-induced aldosterone secretion.
In general, compounds which inhibit activation of the G-protein coupled receptor may be employed for a variety of therapeutic purposes, for example, for the treatment of hypotension and/or hypertension, angina pectoris, myocardial infarction, ulcers, asthma, allergies, benign prostatic hypertrophy, and psychotic and neurological disorders including schizophrenia, manic excitement, depression, delirium, dementia or severe mental retardation, dyskinesias, such as Huntington's disease or Gilles de la Tourett's syndrome, among others. Compounds which inhibit G-protein coupled receptors have also been useful in reversing endogenous anorexia and in the control ofbulimia.
Human galanin receptor-like GPCRs provide therapeutic targets for treating and diagnosing various diseases and abnormalities connected with these receptors. Galanin is co-released with norepinephrine from sympathetic nerve terminals, which suggests that galanin could act via galanin receptors in the periphery to modulate nearly every physiological process controlled by sympathetic innervation.
Additional therapeutic indications include diabetes, hypertension, cardiovascular disorders, regulation of growth hormone release, regulation of fertility, gastric ulcers, gastrointestinal motility/transit/abso tion/secretion, glaucoma, inflammation, immune disorders, respiratory disorders (e.g. asthma, emphysema). See U.S. Patent 5,972,624. Galanin may also play a role in mediating effects on cognition, analgesia, neuroendocrine regulation, control of insulin release, and control of feeding behavior. Galanin receptor agonists may be useful as analgesic agents in the spinal cord. A galanin antagonist may be effective in ameliorating the symptoms of Alzheimer's disease.
Feeding behavior can be modified by administering to a mammal, preferably a human, an amount of a compound which is a galanin receptor-like GPCR agonist or antagonist effective to increase or decrease the consumption of food so as to thereby modify feeding behavior. In one embodiment, the compound is a galanin receptorlike GPCR antagonist and the amount is effective to decrease the consumption of food by the subject. In another embodiment the compound is administered in combination with food. In yet another embodiment the compound is a galanin receptorlike GPCR agonist and the amount is effective to increase the consumption of food by the subject. In a still further embodiment, the compound is administered in combination with food. Thus, an antagonist of the human galanin receptor-like GPCR can be administered to a mammal, including a human, to treat obesity or bulimia. An agonist of the human galanin receptor-like GPCR can be administered to treat anorexia.
Obesity and overweight are defined as an excess of body fat relative to lean body mass. An increase in caloric intake or a decrease in energy expenditure or both can bring about this imbalance leading to surplus energy being stored as fat. Obesity is associated with important medical morbidities and an increase in mortality. The causes of obesity are poorly understood and may be due to genetic factors, environmental factors or a combination of the two to cause a positive energy balance. In contrast, anorexia and cachexia are characterized by an imbalance in energy intake versus energy expenditure leading to a negative energy balance and weight loss. Agents that either increase energy expenditure and/or decrease energy intake, absorption or storage would be useful for treating obesity, overweight, and associated comorbidities. Agents that either increase energy intake and/or decrease energy expenditure or increase the amount of lean tissue would be useful for treating cachexia, anorexia and wasting disorders.
This gene, translated proteins and agents which modulate this gene or portions of the gene or its products are useful for treating obesity, overweight, anorexia, cachexia, wasting disorders, appetite suppression, appetite enhancement, increases or decreases in satiety, modulation of body weight, and/or other eating disorders such as bulimia. Also this gene, translated proteins and agents which modulate this gene or portions of the gene or its products are useful for treating obesity/overweight-associated comor- bidities including hypertension; type 2 diabetes; coronary artery disease; hyper- lipidemia; stroke; gallbladder disease; gout; osteoarthritis; sleep apnea and respiratory problems; some types of cancer including endometrial, breast, prostate and colon; thrombolic disease; polycystic ovarian syndrome; reduced fertility; complications of pregnancy; menstrual iπegularities; hirsutism; stress incontinence and depression.
Human galanin receptor-like GPCRs may be regulated to treat diabetes. Diabetes mellitus is a common metabolic disorder characterized by an abnormal elevation in blood glucose, alterations in lipids and abnormalities (complications) in the cardiovascular system, eye, kidney and nervous system. Diabetes is divided into two separate diseases: type 1 diabetes (juvenile onset), which results from a loss of cells which make and secrete insulin, and type 2 diabetes (adult onset), which is caused by a defect in insulin secretion and a defect in insulin action.
Type 1 diabetes is initiated by an autoimuune reaction that attacks the insulin secreting cells (beta cells) in the pancreatic islets. Agents that prevent this reaction from occurring or that stop the reaction before destruction of the beta cells has been accomplished are potential therapies for this disease. Other agents that induce beta cell proliferation and regeneration also are potential therapies. Type II diabetes is the most common of the two diabetic conditions (6% of the population). The defect in insulin secretion is an important cause of the diabetic condition and results from an inability of the beta cell to properly detect and respond to rises in blood glucose levels with insulin release. Therapies that increase the response by the beta cell to glucose would offer an important new freatment for this disease.
The defect in insulin action in Type II diabetic subjects is another target for therapeutic intervention. Agents that increase the activity of the insulin receptor in muscle, liver, and fat will cause a decrease in blood glucose and a normalization of plasma lipids. The receptor activity can be increased by agents that directly stimulate the receptor or that increase the infracellular signals from the receptor. Other therapies can directly activate the cellular end process, i.e. glucose transport or various enzyme systems, to generate an insulin-like effect and therefore a produce beneficial outcome. Because overweight subjects have a greater susceptibility to
Type II diabetes, any agent that reduces body weight is a possible therapy.
Both Type I and Type diabetes can be treated with agents that mimic insulin action or that treat diabetic complications by reducing blood glucose levels. Likewise, agents that reduces new blood vessel growth can be used to treat the eye complications that develop in both diseases.
CNS disorders which may be treated include brain injuries, cerebrovascular diseases and their consequences, Parkinson's disease, corticobasal degeneration, motor neuron disease, dementia, including ALS, multiple sclerosis, traumatic brain injury, stroke, post-stroke, post-traumatic brain injury, and small-vessel cerebrovascular disease. Dementias, such as Alzheimer's disease, vascular dementia, dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal dementia and Parkinsonism linked to chromosome 17, frontotemporal dementias, including Pick's disease, progressive nuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration, Huntington's disease, thalamic degeneration, Creutzfeld-
Jakob dementia, HIV dementia, schizophrenia with dementia, and Korsakoffs psychosis also can be treated. Similarly, it may be possible to freat cognitive-related disorders, such as mild cognitive impairment, age-associated memory impairment, age-related cognitive decline, vascular cognitive impairment, attention deficit disorders, attention deficit hyperactivity disorders, and memory disturbances in children with learning disabilities, by regulating the activity of human galanin receptor-like GPCR
Pain that is associated with CNS disorders also can be treated by regulating the activity of human galanin receptor-like GPCR Pain which can be treated includes that assoGiftted with central nervous system disorders, such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemoπhage, vascular malformation). Non-central neuropathic pain includes that associated with post mastectomy pain, reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD), trigeminal neuralgiaradioculopathy, post-surgical pain, HIV/AIDS related pain, cancer pain, metabolic neuropathies (e.g., diabetic neuropathy, vasculitic neuropathy secondary to connective tissue disease), paraneoplastic polyneuropathy associated, for example, with carcinoma of lung, or leukemia, or lymphoma, or carcinoma of prostate, colon or stomach, trigeminal neuralgia, cranial neuralgias, and post-herpetic neuralgia. Pain associated with cancer and cancer treatment also can be treated, as can headache pain (for example, migraine with aura, migraine without aura, and other migraine disorders), episodic and chronic tension-type headache, tension-type like headache, cluster headache, and chronic paroxysmal hemicrania.
Cardiovascular diseases include the following disorders of the heart and the vascular system: congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, ischemic diseases of the heart, all kinds of atrial and ventricular aπhythmias, hypertensive vascular diseases, and peripheral vascular diseases. Heart failure is defined as a pathophysiologic state in which an abnormality of cardiac function is responsible for the failure of the heart to pump blood at a rate commensurate with the requirement of the metabolizing tissue. It includes all forms of pumping failure, such as high-output and low-output, acute and chronic, right-sided or left-sided, systolic or diastolic, independent of the underlying cause.
Myocardial infarction (MI) is generally caused by an abrupt decrease in coronary blood flow that follows a thrombotic occlusion of a coronary artery previously naπowed by arteriosclerosis. MI prophylaxis (primary and secondary prevention) is included, as well as the acute treatment of MI and the prevention of complications.
Ischemic diseases are conditions in which the coronary flow is restricted resulting in a perfusion which is inadequate to meet the myocardial requirement for oxygen. This group of diseases includes stable angina, unstable angina, and asymptomatic ischemia.
Anhythmias include all forms of atrial and ventricular tachyaπhythmias (atrial tachycardia, atrial flutter, atrial fibrillation, atrio-ventricular reentrant tachycardia, preexcitation syndrome, ventricular tachycardia, ventricular flutter, and ventricular fibrillation), as well as bradycardic forms of anhythmias.
Vascular diseases include primary as well as all kinds of secondary arterial hypertension (renal, endocrine, neurogenic, others). The disclosed gene and its product may be used as drug targets for the treatment of hypertension as well as for the prevention of all complications. Peripheral vascular diseases are defined as vascular diseases in which arterial and/or venous flow is reduced resulting in an imbalance between blood supply and tissue oxygen demand. It includes chronic peripheral arterial occlusive disease (PAOD), acute arterial thrombosis and embolism, inflammatory vascular disorders, Raynaud's phenomenon, and venous disorders. Allergy is a complex process in which environmental antigens induce clinically adverse reactions. The inducing antigens, called allergens, typically elicit a specific IgE response and, although in most cases the allergens themselves have little or no intrinsic toxicity, they induce pathology when the IgE response in turn elicits an IgE-dependent or T cell-dependent hypersensitivity reaction. Hypersensitivity reactions can be local or systemic and typically occur within minutes of allergen exposure in individuals who have previously been sensitized to an allergen. The hypersensitivity reaction of allergy develops when the allergen is recognized by IgE antibodies bound to specific receptors on the surface of effector cells, such as mast cells, basophils, or eosinophils, which causes the activation of the effector cells and the release of mediators that produce the acute signs and symptoms of the reactions. Allergic diseases include asthma, allergic rhinitis (hay fever), atopic dermatitis, and anaphylaxis.
Asthma is though to arise as a result of interactions between multiple genetic and environmental factors and is characterized by three major features: 1) intermittent and reversible airway obstruction caused by bronchoconstriction, increased mucus production, and thickening of the walls of the airways that leads to a naπowing of the airways, 2) airway hypeπesponsiveness caused by a decreased control of airway caliber, and 3) airway inflammation. Certain cells are critical to the inflammatory reaction of asthma and they include T cells and antigen presenting cells, B cells that produce IgE, and mast cells, basophils, eosinophils, and other cells that bind IgE. These effector cells accumulate at the site of allergic reaction in the airways and release toxic products that contribute to the acute pathology and eventually to the tissue destruction related to the disorder. Other resident cells, such as smooth muscle cells, lung epithelial cells, mucus-producing cells, and nerve cells may also be abnormal in individuals with asthma and may contribute to the pathology. While the airway obstruction of asthma, presenting clinically as an intermittent wheeze and shortness of breath, is generally the most pressing symptom of the disease requiring immediate treatment, the inflammation and tissue destruction associated with the disease can lead to ineversible changes that eventually make asthma a chronic disabling disorder requiring long-term management.
Despite recent important advances in our understanding of the pathophysiology of asthma, the disease appears to be increasing in prevalence and severity (Gergen and
Weiss, Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 146, 823-24, 1992). It is estimated that 30-40% of the population suffer with atopic allergy, and 15% of children and 5% of adults in the population suffer from asthma (Gergen and Weiss, 1992). Thus, an enormous burden is placed on our health care resources. However, both diagnosis and freatment of asthma are difficult. The severity of lung tissue inflammation is not easy to measure and the symptoms of the disease are often indistinguishable from those of respiratory infections, chronic respiratory inflammatory disorders, allergic rhinitis, or other respiratory disorders. Often, the inciting allergen cannot be determined, making removal of the causative environmental agent difficult. Cuπent pharmacological treatments suffer their own set of disadvantages. Commonly used therapeutic agents, such as beta agonists, can act as symptom relievers to transiently improve pulmonary function, but do not affect the underlying inflammation. Agents that can reduce the underlying inflammation, such as anti-inflammatory steroids, can have major drawbacks that range from immunosuppression to bone loss (Goodman and Gilman's THE PHARMACOLOGIC BASIS OF THERAPEUTICS, Seventh Edition, MacMillan
Publishing Company, NY, USA, 1985). In addition, many of the present therapies, such as inhaled corticosteroids, are short-lasting, inconvenient to use, and must be used often on a regular basis, in some cases for life, making failure of patients to comply with the treatment a major problem and thereby reducing their effectiveness as a freatment.
Because of the problems associated with conventional therapies, alternative treatment strategies have been evaluated. Glycophorin A (Chu and Sharom. Cell. Immunol 145, 223-39, 1992), cyclosporin (Alexander et al, Lancet 339, 324-28, 1992), and a nonapeptide fragment of IL-2 (Zav'yalov et al, Immunol. Lett. 31, 285-88, 1992) all inhibit interleukin-2 dependent T lymphocyte proliferation; however, they are known to have many other effects. For example, cyclosporin is used as a immuno- suppressant after organ transplantation. While these agents may represent alternatives to steroids in the treatment of asthmatics, they inhibit interleukin-2 dependent T lymphocyte proliferation and potentially critical immune functions associated with homeostasis. Other treatments that block the release or activity of mediators of bronchochonstriction, such as cromones or anti-leukotrienes, have recently been introduced for the freatment of mild asthma, but they are expensive and not effective in all patients and it is unclear whether they have any effect on the chronic changes associated with asthmatic inflammation. What is needed in the art is the identification of a treatment that can act in pathways critical to the development of asthm.a_th.at both blocks the episodic attacks of the disorder and preferentially dampens the hyperactive allergic immune response without immunocompromising the patient.
This invention further pertains to the use of novel agents identified by the screening assays described above. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to use a test compound identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model. For example, an agent identified as described herein (e.g., a modulating agent, an antisense nucleic acid molecule, a specific antibody, ribozyme, or a protein-binding partner) can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent. Alternatively, an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent. Furthermore, this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
A reagent which affects galanin receptor-like GPCR activity can be administered to a human cell, either in vitro or in vivo, to reduce galanin receptor-like GPCR activity. The reagent preferably binds to an expression product of a human galanin receptorlike GPCR gene. If the expression product is a protein, the reagent is preferably an antibody. For treatment of human cells ex vivo, an antibody can be added to a preparation of stem cells which have been removed from the body. The cells can then be replaced in the same or another human body, with or without clonal propagation, as is known in the art.
In one embodiment, the reagent is delivered using a liposome. Preferably, the liposome is stable in the animal into which it has been administered for at least about
30 minutes, more preferably for at least about 1 hour, and even more preferably for at least about 24 hours. A liposome comprises a lipid composition that is capable of targeting a reagent, particularly a polynucleotide, to a particular site in an animal, such as a human. Preferably, the lipid composition of the liposome is capable of targeting to a specific organ of an animal, such as the lung, liver, spleen, heart brain, lymph nodes, and skin.
A liposome useful in the present invention comprises a lipid composition that is capable of fusing with the plasma membrane of the targeted cell to deliver its contents to the cell. Preferably, the fransfection efficiency of a liposome is about 0.5 μg of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 106 cells, more preferably about 1.0 μg of DNA per 16 nmol of liposome delivered to about 106 cells, and even more preferably about 2.0 μg of DNA per 16 nmol of liposome delivered to about 10 cells. Preferably, a liposome is between about 100 and 500 nm, more preferably between about 150 and 450 nm, and even more preferably between about 200 and
400 nm in diameter.
Suitable liposomes for use in the present invention include those liposomes standardly used in, for example, gene delivery methods known to those of skill in the art. More prefeπed liposomes include liposomes having a polycationic lipid composition and/or liposomes having a cholesterol backbone conjugated to polyethylene glycol. Optionally, a liposome comprises a compound capable of targeting the liposome to a tumor cell, such as a tumor cell ligand exposed on the outer surface of the liposome. Complexing a liposome with a reagent such as an antisense oligonucleotide or ribozyme can be achieved using methods which are standard in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent 5,705,151). Preferably, from about 0.1 μg to about 10 μg of polynucleotide is combined with about 8 nmol of liposomes, more preferably from about 0.5 μg to about 5 μg of polynucleotides are combined with about 8 nmol liposomes, and even more preferably about 1.0 μg of polynucleotides is combined with about 8 nmol liposomes.
In another embodiment, antibodies can be delivered to specific tissues in vivo using receptor-mediated targeted delivery. Receptor-mediated DNA delivery techniques are taught in, for example, Findeis et al. Trends in Biotechnol 11, 202-05 (1993);
Chiou et al, GENE THERAPEUTICS: METHODS AND APPLICATIONS OF DIRECT GENE
TRANSFER (J.A. Wolff, ed.) (1994); Wu & Wu, J. Biol. Chem. 263, 621-24 (1988);
Wu et al, J. Biol. Chem. 269, 542-46 (1994); Zenke et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87, 3655-59 (1990); Wu et al, J. Biol. Chem. 266, 338-42 (1991).
Determination of a Therapeutically Effective Dose
The determination of a therapeutically effective dose is well within the capability of those skilled in the art. A therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of active ingredient which increases or decreases galanin receptor-like GPCR activity relative to the galanin receptor-like GPCR activity which occurs in the absence of the therapeutically effective dose.
For any compound, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially either in cell culture assays or in animal models, usually mice, rabbits, dogs, or pigs. The animal model also can be used to determine the appropriate concentration range and route of administration. Such information can then be used to determine useful doses and routes for administration in humans. Therapeutic efficacy and toxicity, e.g., ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population) and LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population), can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals. The dose ratio of toxic to therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index, and it can be expressed as the ratio, LD5o/ED5o.
Pharmaceutical compositions which exhibit large therapeutic indices are prefeπed. The data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies is used in formulating a range of dosage for human use. The dosage contained in such compositions is preferably within a range of circulating concenfrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage varies within this range depending upon the dosage form employed, sensitivity of the patient, and the route of administration.
The exact dosage will be determined by the practitioner, in light of factors related to the subject that requires treatment. Dosage and administration are adjusted to provide sufficient levels of the active ingredient or to maintain the desired effect.
Factors which can be taken into account include the severity of the disease state, general health of the subject, age, weight, and gender of the subject, diet, time and frequency of administration, drug combination(s), reaction sensitivities, and tolerance/response to therapy. Long-acting pharmaceutical compositions can be administered every 3 to 4 days, every week, or once every two weeks depending on the half-life and clearance rate of the particular formulation.
Normal dosage amounts can vary from 0.1 to 100,000 micrograms, up to a total dose of about 1 g, depending upon the route of administration. Guidance as to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the literature and generally available to practitioners in the art. Those skilled in the art will employ different formulations for nucleotides than for proteins or their inhibitors. Similarly, delivery of polynucleotides or polypeptides will be specific to particular cells, conditions, locations, etc. If the reagent is a single-chain antibody, polynucleotides encoding the antibody can be constructed and introduced into a cell either ex vivo or in vivo using well- established techniques including, but not limited to, fransferrin-polycation-mediated DNA transfer, transfection with naked or encapsulated nucleic acids, liposome- mediated cellular fusion, intracellular transportation of DNA-coated latex beads, protoplast fusion, viral infection, elecfroporation, "gene gun," and DEAE- or calcium phosphate-mediated transfection.
Effective in vivo dosages of an antibody are in the range of about 5 μg to about 50 μg kg, about 50 μg to about 5 mg/kg, about 100 μg to about 500 μg/kg of patient body weight, and about 200 to about 250 μg/kg of patient body weight. For administration of polynucleotides encoding single-chain antibodies, effective in vivo dosages are in the range of about 100 ng to about 200 ng, 500 ng to about 50 mg, about 1 μg to about 2 mg, about 5 μg to about 500 μg, and about 20 μg to about 100 μg ofDNA.
If the expression product is mRNA, the reagent is preferably an antisense oligonucleotide or a ribozyme. Polynucleotides which express antisense oligonucleotides or ribozymes can be introduced into cells by a variety of methods, as described above.
Preferably, a reagent reduces expression of a galanin receptor-like GPCR gene or the activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100%o relative to the absence of the reagent. The effectiveness of the mechanism chosen to decrease the level of expression of a galanin receptor-like GPCR gene or the activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide can be assessed using methods well known in the art, such as hybridization of nucleotide probes to galanin receptor-like GPCR-specific mRNA, quantitative RT- PCR, immunologic detection of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, or measurement of galanin receptor-like GPCR activity. In any of the embodiments described above, any of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered in combination with other appropriate therapeutic agents. Selection of the appropriate agents for use in combination therapy can be made by one of ordinary skill in the art, according to conventional pharmaceutical principles. The combination of therapeutic agents can act synergistically to effect the treatment or prevention of the various disorders described above. Using this approach, one may be able to achieve therapeutic efficacy with lower dosages of each agent, thus reducing the potential for adverse side effects.
Any of the therapeutic methods described above can be applied to any subject in need of such therapy, including, for example, mammals such as dogs, cats, cows, horses, rabbits, monkeys, and most preferably, humans.
Diagnostic Methods
The invention also relates to the use of galanin receptor-like GPCR genes as part of a diagnostic assay for detecting diseases and abnormalities or susceptibility to diseases and abnormalities related to the presence of mutations in the nucleic acid sequences which encode a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. Such diseases, by way of example, are related to cell transformation, such as tumors and cancers, and various cardiovascular disorders, including hypertension and hypotension, as well as diseases arising from abnormal blood flow, abnormal angiotensin-induced aldosterone secretion, and other abnormal control of fluid and electrolyte homeostasis.
Using polynucleotides disclosed herein, differences can be determined between the cDNA or genomic sequence of individuals afflicted with a disease and normal individuals. If a mutation is observed in some or all of the afflicted individuals but not in normal individuals, then the mutation is likely to be the causative agent of the disease. Sequence differences between a reference gene and a gene having mutations can be revealed by the direct DNA sequencing method. In addition, cloned DNA segments can be employed as probes to detect specific DNA segments. The sensitivity of this method is greatly enhanced when combined with PCR. For example, a sequencing primer can be used with a double-sfranded PCR product or a single-stranded template molecule generated by a modified PCR. The sequence determination is performed by conventional procedures using radiolabeled nucleotides or by automatic sequencing procedures using fluorescent tags.
Genetic testing based on DNA sequence differences can be carried out by detection of alteration in elecfrophoretic mobility of DNA fragments in' gels with or without denaturing agents. Small sequence deletions and insertions can be visualized by high resolution gel electrophoresis. DNA fragments of different sequences can be distinguished on denaturing formamide gradient gels in which the mobilities of different DNA fragments are retarded in the gel at different positions according to their specific melting or partial melting temperatures (see, e.g., Myers et al, Science 230, 1242, 1985). Sequence changes at specific locations can also be revealed by nuclease protection assays, such as RNase and S 1 protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g., Cotton et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85, 4397-4401, 1985). Thus, the detection of a specific DNA sequence can be performed by methods such as hybridization, RNase protection, chemical cleavage, direct DNA sequencing or the use of restriction enzymes and Southern blotting of genomic DNA. In addition to direct methods such as gel-electrophoresis and DNA sequencing, mutations can also be detected by in situ analysis.
Another embodiment is a diagnostic assay for detecting altered levels of galanin receptor-like polypeptides in various tissues. Assays used to detect levels of the receptor polypeptides in a sample derived from a host are well known to those of skill in the art and include radioimmunoassays, competitive binding assays, Western blot analysis, and ELISA assays. AU patents and patent applications cited in this disclosure are expressly incoφorated herein by reference. The above disclosure generally describes the present invention. A more complete understanding can be obtained by reference to the following specific examples which are provided for puφoses of illustration only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
EXAMPLE 1
Detection of galanin receptor-like GPCR activity
The polynucleotide of SEQ ID NO: 3 is inserted into the expression vector pCEV4 and the expression vector pCEV4-galanin receptor-like polypeptide obtained is fransfected into human embryonic kidney 293 cells. The cells are scraped from a culture flask into 5 ml of Tris HCl, 5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5, and lysed by sonication. Cell lysates are centrifuged at 1000 rpm for 5 minutes at 4°C. The supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 x g for 20 minutes at 4°C. The pellet is suspended in binding buffer containing 50 mM Tris HCl, 5 mM MgSO4, 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl, pH 7.5, supplemented with 0.1 % BSA, 2 mg/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 mg/ml phosphoramidon. Optimal membrane suspension dilutions, defined as the protein concentration required to bind less than 10 % of an added radioligand, i.e. 125I-labeled porcine galanin, are added to 96-well polypropylene microtiter plates containing ligand, non-labeled peptides, and binding buffer to a final volume of 250 ml.
In equilibrium saturation binding assays, membrane preparations are incubated in the presence of increasing concenfrations (0.1 nM to 4 nM) of 125I ligand.
Binding reaction mixtures are incubated for one hour at 30°C. The reaction is stopped by filtration through GF/B filters treated with 0.5% polyethyleneimine, using a cell harvester. Radioactivity is measured by scintillation counting, and data are analyzed by a computerized non-linear regression program. Non-specific binding is defined as the amount of radioactivity remaining after incubation of membrane protein in the presence of 100 nM of unlabeled peptide. Protein concentration is measured by the Bradford method using Bio-Rad Reagent, with bovine serum albumin as a standard. The galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence of SEQ ID NO: 2 is demonstrated. EXAMPLE 2
Radioligand binding assays
Transfected cells from culture flasks are scraped into 5 ml of Tris-HCl, 5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5, and lysed by sonication. The cell lysates are centrifuged at 1000 φm for 5 min. at 4°C, and the supernatant is centrifuged at 30,000 x g for 20 min. at 4°C. The pellet is suspended in binding buffer (50 mM Tris-HCl, 5 mM MgSO4, 1 mM EDTA, 100 mM NaCl at pH 7.5 supplemented with 0.1% BSA, 2 μg/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 μg/ml phosphoramidon). Optimal membrane suspension dilutions, defined as the protein concentration required to bind less than 10% of the added radioligand, i.e. I25I-labeled porcine galanin, are added to 96-well polypropylene microtiter plates containing I-labeled peptide, non-labeled peptides, and binding buffer to a final volume of 250 μl.
In equilibrium saturation binding assays membrane preparations are incubated in the presence of increasing concentrations (0.1 nM to 4 nM) of I-porcine galanin (specific activity 2200 Ci/mmol). The binding affinities of the different galanin
19 analogs are determined in equilibrium competition bmding assays, using 0.1 nM I- porcine galanin in the presence of twelve different concentrations of the displacing ligands. Binding reaction mixtures are incubated for 1 hr at 30° C, and the reaction is stopped by filtration through GF/B filters treated with 0.5% polyethyleneimine, using a cell harvester. Radioactivity is measured by scintillation counting and data are analyzed by a computerized non-linear regression program. Non-specific binding is defined as the amount of radioactivity remaining after incubation of membrane protein in the presence of 100 nM of unlabeled porcine galanin. Protein concentration is measured by the Bradford method using Bio-Rad Reagent, with bovine serum albumin as a standard. EXAMPLE 3
Effect of a test compound on galanin receptor-like GPCR-mediated cyclic AMP formation
The receptor-mediated inhibition of cyclic AMP (cAMP) formation is assayed in LM(tk-) cells expressing rat GALRl and human galanin receptor-like GPCR receptors. Cells are plated in 96 well plates and incubated in Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline (PBS) supplemented with 10 mM HEPES, 5 mM theophylline, 2 μg/ml aprotinin, 0.5 mg/ml leupeptin, and 10 μg/ml phosphoramidon for 20 min at
37°C, in 5% CO2. Galanin or test compounds are added and incubated for an additional 10 min at 37° C. The medium is aspirated, and the reaction is stopped by the addition of 100 mM HCl. The plates are stored at 4° C for 15 min, and the cAMP content in the stopping solution is measured by radioimmunoassay. Radioactivity is quantified using a gamma counter equipped with data reduction software.
EXAMPLE 4
Effect of a test compound on the mobilization of intracellular calcium
Infracellular free calcium concentration can be measured by microspecfrofluorometry using the fluorescent indicator dye Fura-2/AM (Bush et al, J. Neurochem. 57, 562- 74, 1991). Stably fransfected cells are seeded onto a 35 mm culture dish containing a glass coverslip insert. Cells are washed with HBS , incubated with a test compound, and loaded with 100 μl of Fura-2/AM (10 μM) for 20-40 minutes. After washing with HBS to remove the Fura-2/AM solution, cells are equilibrated in HBS for 10- 20 minutes. Cells are then visualized under the 40X objective of a Leitz Fluovert FS microscope.
Fluorescence emission is determined at 510 nM, with excitation wavelengths alternating between 340 nM and 380 nM. Raw fluorescence data are converted to calcium concenfrations using standard calcium concentration curves and software analysis techniques. A test compound which increases the fluorescence by at least 15% relative to fluorescence in the absence of a test compound is identified as a compound which mobilizes infracellular calcium.
EXAMPLE 5
Effect of a test compound on phosphoinositide metabolism
LM(tk-) cells which stably express human galanin receptor-like GPCR cDNA are plated in 96-well plates and grown to confluence. The day before the assay, the growth medium is changed to 100 μl of medium containing 1% serum and 0.5 μCi 3H-myinositol. The plates are incubated overnight in a CO2 incubator (5% CO at 37°C). Immediately before the assay, the medium is removed and replaced by 200 μl of PBS containing 10 mM LiCl, and the cells are equilibrated with the new medium for 20 minutes. During this interval, cells also are equilibrated with antagonist, added as a 10 μl aliquot of a 20-fold concentrated solution in PBS.
The 3H-inositol phosphate accumulation from inositol phospholipid metabolism is started by adding 10 μl of a solution containing a test compound. To the first well
10 μl are added to measure basal accumulation. Eleven different concentrations of test compound are assayed in the following 11 wells of each plate row. All assays are performed in duplicate by repeating the same additions in two consecutive plate rows.
The plates are incubated in a CO2 incubator for one hour. The reaction is terminated by adding 15 μl of 50% v/v trichloroacetic acid (TCA), followed by a 40 minute incubation at 4°C. After neutralizing TCA with 40 μl of 1 M Tris, the content of the wells is transfeπed to a Multiscreen HV filter plate (Milhpore) containing Dowex AG1-X8 (200-400 mesh, formate form). The filter plates are prepared by adding
200 μl of Dowex AG1 -X8 suspension (50% v/v, wateπresin) to each well. The filter plates are placed on a vacuum manifold to wash or elute the resin bed. Each well is washed 2 times with 200 μl of water, followed by 2 x 200 μl of 5 mM sodium tefraborate/60 mM ammonium formate.
The 3H-IPs are eluted into empty 96-well plates with 200 μl of 1.2 M ammonium formate/0.1 formic acid. The content of the wells is added to 3 ml of scintillation cocktail, and radioactivity is determined by liquid scintillation counting.
EXAMPLE 6
Receptor Binding Methods
Standard Binding Assays. Binding assays are carried out in a binding buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 7.4, 0.5% BSA, and 5 mM MgCl2. The standard assay for radioligand binding to membrane fragments comprising GPCR homo log 2 polypeptides is carried out as follows in 96 well microtiter plates (e.g., Dynatech Immulon II Removawell plates). Radioligand is diluted in binding buffer+ PMSF/Baci to the desired cpm per 50 μl, then 50 μl aliquots are added to the wells. For non-specific binding samples, 5 μl of 40 μM cold ligand also is added per well. Binding is initiated by adding 150 μl per well of membrane diluted to the desired concentration (10-30 μg membrane protein/well) in binding buffer+ PMSF/Baci. Plates are then covered with Linbro mylar plate sealers (Flow Labs) and placed on a Dynatech Microshaker II. Binding is allowed to proceed at room temperature for 1-2 hours and is stopped by centrifuging the plate for 15 minutes at 2,000 x g. The supematants are decanted, and the membrane pellets are washed once by addition of
200 μl of ice cold binding buffer, brief shaking, and recentrifugation. The individual wells are placed in 12 x 75 mm tubes and counted in an LKB Gammamaster counter (78%) efficiency). Specific binding by this method is identical to that measured when free ligand is removed by rapid (3-5 seconds) filtration and washing on polyethyleneimine-coated glass fiber filters. Three variations of the standard binding assay are also used.
1. Competitive radioligand binding assays with a concentration range of cold ligand vs. 125 I^abeled ligand are carried out as described above with one modification. All dilutions of ligands being assayed are made in 40X
PMSF/Baci to a concentration 40X the final concentration in the assay. Samples of peptide (5 μl each) are then added per microtiter well. Membranes and radioligand are diluted in binding buffer without protease inhibitors. Radioligand is added and mixed with cold ligand, and then binding is initiated by addition of membranes.
2. Chemical cross-linking of radioligand with receptor is done after a binding step identical to the standard assay. However, the wash step is done with binding buffer minus BSA to reduce the possibility of non-specific cross-linking of radioligand with BSA. The cross-linking step is carried out as described below.
3. Larger scale binding assays to obtain membrane pellets for studies on solubilization of receptor: ligand complex and for receptor purification are also carried out. These are identical to the standard assays except that (a) binding is carried out in polypropylene tubes in volumes from 1-250 ml, (b) concentration of membrane protein is always 0.5 mg/ml, and (c) for receptor purification, BSA concentration in the binding buffer is reduced to 0.25%, and the wash step is done with binding buffer without BSA, which reduces BSA contamination of the purified receptor. EXAMPLE 7
Chemical Cross-Linking of Radioligand to Receptor
After a radioligand binding step as described- abov , ^tnembrane pellets are resuspended in 200 μl per microtiter plate well of ice-cold binding buffer without BSA. Then 5 μl per well of 4 mM N-5-azido-2-nitrobenzoyloxysuccinimide (ANB-NOS, Pierce) in DMSO is added and mixed. The samples are held on ice and UV-iπadiated for 10 minutes with a Mineralight R-52G lamp (UVP Inc., San Gabriel, Calif.) at a distance of 5-10 cm. Then the samples are fransfeπed to
Eppendorf microfuge tubes, the membranes pelleted by centrifugation, supematants removed, and membranes solubilized in Laemmli SDS sample buffer for polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis (PAGE). PAGE is carried out as described below. Radiolabeled proteins are visualized by autoradiography of the dried gels with Kodak XAR film and Dupont image intensifier screens.
EXAMPLE 8
Membrane Solubilization
Membrane solubilization is carried out in buffer containing 25 mM Tris , pH 8, 10%o glycerol (w/v) and 0.2 mM CaCl2 (solubilization buffer). The highly soluble detergents including Triton X-100, deoxycholate, deoxycholate:lyso lecithin, CHAPS, and zwittergent are made up in solubilization buffer at 10% concenfrations and stored as frozen aliquots. Lysolecithin is made up fresh because of insolubility upon freeze-thawing and digitonin is made fresh at lower concentrations due to its more limited solubility.
To solubilize membranes, washed pellets after the binding step are resuspended free of visible particles by pipetting and vortexing in solubilization buffer at 100,000 x g for 30 minutes. The supematants are removed and held on ice and the pellets are discarded.
EXAMPLE 9
Assay of Solubilized Receptors
After binding of 125I ligands and solubilization of the membranes with detergent, the intact R:L complex can be assayed by four different methods. All are carried out on ice or in a cold room at 4- 10°C).
1. Column chromatography (Knuhtsen et al, Biochem. J. 254, 641-647, 1988). Sephadex G-50 columns (8 x 250 mm) are equilibrated with solubilization buffer containing detergent at the concentration used to solubilize membranes and 1 mg/ml bovine serum albumin. Samples of solubilized membranes (0.2-
0.5 ml) are applied to the columns and eluted at a flow rate of about 0.7 ml/minute. Samples (0.18 ml) are collected. Radioactivity is determined in a gamma counter. Void volumes of the columns are determined by the elution volume of blue dextran. Radioactivity eluting in the void volume is considered bound to protein. Radioactivity eluting later, at the same volume
1 as free I ligands, is considered non-bound.
2. Polyethyleneglycol precipitation (Cuatrecasas, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 69, 318-322, 1972). For a 100 μl sample of solubilized membranes in a 12 x 75 mm polypropylene tube, 0.5 ml of 1% (w/v) bovine gamma globulin
(Sigma) in 0.1 M sodium phosphate buffer is added, followed by 0.5 ml of 25% (w/v) polyethyleneglycol (Sigma) and mixing. The mixture is held on ice for 15 minutes. Then 3 ml of 0.1 M sodium phosphate, pH 7.4, is added per sample. The samples are rapidly (1-3 seconds) filtered over Whatman GF/B glass fiber filters and washed with 4 ml of the phosphate buffer. PEG- precipitated receptor : 125 I-ligand complex is determined by gamma counting of the filters.
3. GFB/PEI filter binding (Bruns et al, Analytical Biochem. 132, 74-81, 1983). Whatman GF B glass fiber filters are soaked in 0.3% polyethyleneimine (PEL,
Sigma) for 3 hours. Samples of solubilized membranes (25-100 μl) are replaced in 12 x 75 mm polypropylene tubes. Then 4 ml of solubilization buffer without detergent is added per sample and the samples are immediately filtered through the GFB/PEI filters (1-3 seconds) and washed with 4 ml of solubilization buffer. CPM of receptor : 125 I-ligand complex adsorbed to filters are determined by gamma counting.
4. Charcoal/Dextran (Paul and Said, Peptides 7[Suppl i7,147-149, 1986). Dextran T70 (0.5 g, Pharmacia) is dissolved in 1 liter of water, then 5 g of activated charcoal (Norit A, alkaline; Fisher Scientific) is added. The suspension is stiπed for 10 minutes at room temperature and then stored at 4 °C. until use. To measure R:L complex, 4 parts by volume of charcoal/dextran suspension are added to 1 part by volume of solubilized membrane. The samples are mixed and held on ice for 2 minutes and then centrifuged for 2 minutes at 11,000 x g in a Beckman microfuge. Free radioligand is adsorbed charcoal/dextran and is discarded with the pellet. Receptor : 125 I-ligand complexes remain in the supernatant and are determined by gamma counting.
EXAMPLE 10
Receptor Purification
Binding of biotinyl-receptor to GH4 Cl membranes is carried out as described above. Incubations are for 1 hour at room temperature. In the standard purification protocol, the binding incubations contain 10 nM Bio-S29. I 25l ligand is added as a tracer at levels of 5,000-100,000 cpm per mg of membrane protein. Control incubations contain 10 μM cold ligand to saturate the receptor with non-biotinylated ligand.
Solubilization of receptor:ligand complex also is carried out as described above, with 0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin in solubilization buffer containing 0.2 mM MgCl2, to obtain 100,000 x g supematants containing solubilized R:L complex.
Immobilized sfreptavidin (sfreptavidin cross-linked to 6% beaded agarose, Pierce Chemical Co.; "SA-agarose") is washed in solubilization buffer and added to the solubilized membranes as 1/30 of the final volume. This mixture is incubated with constant stirring by end-over-end rotation for 4-5 hours at 4-10°C. Then the mixture is applied to a column and the non-bound material is washed through. Binding of radioligand to SA-agarose is determined by comparing cpm in the 100,000 x g supernatant with that in the column effluent after adsoφtion to SA-agarose. Finally, the column is washed with 12-15 column volumes of solubilization buffer+0.15% deoxycho late: lyso lecithin +1/500 (vol/vol) 100 x 4pase.
The sfreptavidin column is eluted with solubilization buffer+0.1 mM EDTA+0.1 mM EGTA+0.1 mM GTP-gamma-S (Sigma)+0.15% (wt/vol) deoxycholate:lysolecithin +1/1000 (vol/vol) 100.times.4pase. First, one column volume of elution buffer is passed through the column and flow is stopped for 20-30 minutes. Then 3-4 more column volumes of elution buffer are passed through. All the eluates are pooled.
Eluates from the sfreptavidin column are incubated overnight (12-15 hours) with immobilized wheat germ agglutinin (WGA agarose, Vector Labs) to adsorb the receptor via interaction of covalently bound carbohydrate with the WGA lectin. The ratio (vol/vol) of WGA-agarose to sfreptavidin column eluate is generally 1 :400. A range from 1 :1000 to 1 :200 also can be used. After the binding step, the resin is pelleted by centrifugation, the supernatant is removed and saved, and the resin is washed 3 times (about 2 minutes each) in buffer containing 50 mM HEPES, pH 8, 5 mM MgCl2, and 0.15% deoxycholate:lysolecithin. To elute the WGA-bound receptor, the resin is extracted three times by repeated mixing (vortex mixer on low speed) over a 15-30 minute period on ice, with 3 resin columns each time, of 10 mM N-N'-N"-triacetylchitotriose in the same HEPES buffer used to wash the resin. After each elution step, the resin is centrifuged down and the supernatant is carefully removed, free of WGA-agarose pellets. The three, pooled eluates contain the final, purified receptor. The material non-bound to WGA contain G protein subunits specifically eluted from the sfreptavidin column, as well as non-specific contaminants. All these fractions are stored frozen at -90 °C.
EXAMPLE 11
Effect of a test compound on galanin receptor-like GPCR -mediated food intake
To determine whether a compound is a human galanin receptor-like GPCR antagonist, food intake in rats may be stimulated by administration of the human galanin receptor-like GPCR-selective peptide agonist [D-Tφ2 ]-galanin1-29 through an intracerebroventricular (i.c.v.) cannula. A prefeπed anatomic location for injection is the hypothalamus, in particular, the paraventricular nucleus. Methods of cannulation and food intake measurements are well-known in the art, as are i.c.v. modes of administration (Kyrkouli et al, 1990, Ogren et al, 1992). T o determine whether a test compound reduces [D-Tφ2 ]-galanin1-29 stimulated food intake, the test compound is administered either simultaneously with the peptide, or separately, either through cannula, or by subcutaneous, intramuscular, or intraperitoneal injection, or more preferably, orally.
EXAMPLE 12
Pharmacological characterization of galanin receptor-like GPCR
The pharmacology of human galanin receptor-like GPCR is studied in COS-7 cells transiently fransfected with a human galanin receptor-like GPCR-cncoding cDNA. Membrane preparations of COS-7 cells fransfected with K985 display specific binding to [ Ijporcine galamn. Scatchard analysis of equilibrium saturation binding data is used to determine K<j and Bmax. The pharmacological properties of human galanin receptor-like GPCR cDNA are probed by measuring the binding affinities of a series of galanin analogs, and compared to those of the rat GALRl receptor expressed in the same host cell line.
EXAMPLE 13
Identification of a test compound which binds to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide
Purified galanin receptor-like polypeptides comprising a glutathione-S-fransferase protein and absorbed onto glutathione-derivatized wells of 96-well microtiter plates are contacted with test compounds from a small molecule library at pH 7.0 in a physiological buffer solution. Galanin receptor-like polypeptides comprise an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO:2. The test compounds comprise a fluorescent tag. The samples are incubated for 5 minutes to one hour. Control samples are incubated in the absence of a test compound.
The buffer solution containing the test compounds is washed from the wells.
Binding of a test compound to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide is detected by fluorescence measurements of the contents of the wells. A test compound which increases the fluorescence in a well by at least 15% relative to fluorescence of a well in which a test compound was not incubated is identified as a compound which binds to a galanin receptor-like polypeptide. EXAMPLE 14
Identification of a test compound which decreases human galanin receptor-like GPCR gene expression
A test compound is administered to a culture of human CHO cells which express human galanin receptor-like GPCR and incubated at 37 °C for 10 to 45 minutes. A culture of the same type of cells incubated for the same time without the test compound provides a negative control.
RNA is isolated from the two cultures as described in Chirgwin et al, Biochem. 18, 5294-99, 1979). Northern blots are prepared using 20 to 30 μg total RNA and hybridized with a 2P-labeled galanin receptor-like GPCR-specific probe at 65° C in Express-hyb (CLONTECH). The probe comprises at least 11 contiguous nucleotides selected from the complement of SEQ ID NO:3. A test compound which decreases the galanin receptor-like GPCR-specific signal relative to the signal obtained in the absence of the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of galanin receptor-like GPCR gene expression.
EXAMPLE 15
Tissue-specific expression of galanin receptor-lile GPCR
The qualitative expression pattern of galanin receptor-like GPCR in various tissues is determined by Reverse Transcription-Polymerase Chain Reaction (RT-PCR).
To demonstrate that galanin receptor-like GPCR is involved in the disease process of diabetes, the following whole body panel is screened to show predominant or relatively high expression: subcutaneous and mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone maπow, brain, colon, fetal brain, heart, hypothalamus, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle, small intestine, spleen, stomach, testis, thymus, thyroid, trachea, and uterus. Human islet cells and an islet cell library also are tested. As a final step, the expression of galanin receptor-like GPCR in cells derived from normal individuals with the expression of cells derived from diabetic individuals is compared.
To demonstrate that galanin receptor-like GPCR is involved in the disease process of obesity, expression is determined in the following tissues: subcutaneous adipose tissue, mesenteric adipose tissue, adrenal gland, bone maπow, brain (cerebellum, spinal cord, cerebral cortex, caudate, medulla, substantia nigra, and putamen), colon, fetal brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle small intestine, spleen, stomach, testes, thymus, thyroid trachea, and uterus. Neuroblastoma cell lines SK-Nr-Be (2), Hr, Sk-N-As, HTB-10, IMR-32, SNSY-5Y, T3, SK-N-D2, D283, DAOY, CHP-2, U87MG, BE(2)C, T986, KANTS, MO59K, CHP234, C6 (rat), SK-N-F1, SK-PU-DW, PFSK- 1, BE(2)M17, and MCIXC also are tested for galanin receptor-like GPCR expression. As a final step, the expression of galanin receptor-like GPCR in cells derived from normal individuals with the expression of cells derived from obese individuals is compared.
To demonstrate that galanin receptor-like GPCR is involved in the disease process of asthma, the following whole body panel is screened to show predominant or relatively high expression in lung or immune tissues: brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, trachea, bone marrow, colon, small intestine, spleen, stomach, thymus, mammary gland, skeletal muscle, prostate, testis, uterus, cerebellum, fetal brain, fetal liver, spinal cord, placenta, adrenal gland, pancreas, salivary gland, thyroid, peripheral blood leukocytes, lymph node, and tonsil. Once this is established, the following lung and immune system cells are screened to localize expression to particular cell subsets: lung microvascular endothelial cells, bronchial/trachial epithelial cells, bronchial/trachial smooth muscle cells, lung fibroblasts, T cells (T helper 1 subset, T helper 2 subset, NKT cell subset, and cytotoxic T lymphocytes), B cells, mononuclear cells (monocytes and macrophages), mast cells, eosinophils, neutrophils, and dendritic cells. As a final step, the expression galanin receptor-like GPCR in cells derived from normal individuals with the expression of cells derived from asthmatic individuals is compared.
To demonsfrate that galanin receptor-like GPCR is involved in CNS disorders, the following tissues are screened: fetal and adult brain, muscle, heart, lung, kidney, liver, thymus, testis, colon, placenta, trachea, pancreas, kidney, gastric mucosa, colon, liver, cerebellum, skin, cortex (Alzheimer's and normal), hypothalamus, cortex, amygdala, cerebellum, hippocampus, choroid, plexus, thalamus, and spinal cord.
Quantitative expression profiling. Quantitative expression profiling is performed by the form of quantitative PCR analysis called "kinetic analysis" first described in Higuchi et al., BioTechnology 10, 413-17, 1992, and Higuchi et al, BioTechnology 11, 1026-30, 1993. The principle is that at any given cycle within the exponential phase of PCR, the amount of product is proportional to the initial number of template copies.
If the amplification is performed in the presence of an internally quenched fluorescent oligonucleotide (TaqMan probe) complementary to the target sequence, the probe is cleaved by the 5 '-3' endonuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase and a fluorescent dye released in the medium (Holland et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
U.S.A. 88, 7276-80, 1991). Because the fluorescence emission will increase in direct proportion to the amount of the specific amplified product, the exponential growth phase of PCR product can be detected and used to determine the initial template concentration (Heid et al, Genome Res. 6, 986-94, 1996, and Gibson et al, Genome
Res. 5, 995-1001, 1996).
The amplification of an endogenous control can be performed to standardize the amount of sample RNA added to a reaction. In this kind of experiment, the control of choice is the 18S ribosomal RNA. Because reporter dyes with differing emission spectra are available, the target and the endogenous confrol can be independently quantified in the same tube if probes labeled with different dyes are used.
All "real time PCR" measurements of fluorescence were made in the ABI Prism 7700.
RNA extraction and cDNA preparation. Total RNA from the tissues listed above was used for expression quantification. RNAs labeled "from autopsy" were extracted from autoptic tissues with the TRIzol reagent (Life Technologies, MD) according to the manufacturer's protocol. . -
Fifty μg of each RNA were treated with DNase I for 1 hour at 37°C in the following reaction mix: 0.2 U/μl RNase-free DNase I (Roche Diagnostics, Germany); 0.4 U/μl RNase inhibitor (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.9; lOmM MgCl2; 50 mM NaCl; and 1 mM DTT.
After incubation, RNA was extracted once with 1 volume of phenol:chloroform:isoamyl alcohol (24:24:1) and once with chloroform, and precipitated with 1/10 volume of 3 M NaAcetate, pH5.2, and 2 volumes of ethanol.
Fifty μg of each RNA from the autoptic tissues were DNase treated with the DNA-free kit purchased from Ambion (Ambion, TX). After resuspension and spectrophotometric quantification, each sample was reverse transcribed with the TaqMan Reverse Transcription Reagents (PE Applied Biosystems, CA) according to the manufacturer's protocol. The final concentration of RNA in the reaction mix was
200ng/μL. Reverse transcription was caπied out with 2.5 μM of random hexamer primers.
TaqMan quantitative analysis. Specific primers and probe were designed according to the recommendations of PE Applied Biosystems and are listed below: forward primer: 5'-(gene specific sequence)-3' reverse primer: 5 '-(gene specific sequence)-3' probe: 5'-(FAM) -(gene specific sequence) (TAMRA)-3' where FAM = 6-carboxy-fluorescein and TAMRA = 6-carboxy-tetramethyl-rhodamine. The expected length of the PCR product is -(gene specific length)bp.
Quantification experiments were performed on 10 ng of reverse transcribed RNA from each sample. Each determination was done in triplicate.
Total cDNA content was normalized with the simultaneous quantification (multiplex
PCR) of the 18S ribosomal RNA using the Pre-Developed TaqMan Assay Reagents (PDAR) Control Kit (PE Applied Biosystems, CA).
The assay reaction mix was as follows: IX final TaqMan Universal PCR Master Mix (from 2X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from
20X stock); 300 nM forward primer; 900 nM reverse primer; 200 nM probe; 10 ng cDNA; and water to 25 μl.
Each of the following steps was carried out once: pre PCR, 2 minutes at 50°C, and 10 minutes at 95°C. The following steps were carried out 40 times: denaturation,
15 seconds at 95°C, annealing/extension, 1 minute at 60°C.
The experiment was performed on an ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detector (PE Applied Biosystems, CA). At the end of the run, fluorescence data acquired during PCR were processed as described in the ABI Prism 7700 user's manual in order to achieve better background subtraction as well as signal linearity with the starting target quantity.
The results of expression profiling for somatostatin receptor-like protein are shown below in Table 1. Table 1
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000088_0001
EXAMPLE 16
Diabetes: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
Glucose Production:
Over-production of glucose by the liver, due to an enhanced rate of gluconeogenesis, is the major cause of fasting hyperglycemia in diabetes. Overnight fasted normal rats or mice have elevated rates of gluconeogenesis as do streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats or mice fed ad libitum. Rats are made diabetic with a single intravenous injection of 40 mg/kg of streptozotocin while C57BL/KsJ mice are given 40- 60 mgkg i.p. for 5 consecutive days. Blood glucose is measured from tail-tip blood and then compounds are administered via different routes (p.o., i.p., i.v., s.c). Blood is collected at various times thereafter and glucose measured. Alternatively, compounds are administered for several days, then the animals are fasted overnight, blood is collected and plasma glucose measured. Compounds that inhibit glucose production will decrease plasma glucose levels compared to the vehicle-treated control group.
Insulin Sensitivity:
Both ob/ob and db/db mice as well as diabetic Zucker rats are hyperglycemic, hyperinsulinemic and insulin resistant. The animals are pre-bled, their glucose levels measured, and then they are grouped so that the mean glucose level is the same for each group. Compounds are administered daily either q.d. or b.i.d. by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c.) for 7-28 days. Blood is collected at various times and plasma glucose and insulin levels determined. Compounds that improve insulin sensitivity in these models will decrease both plasma glucose and insulin levels when compared to the vehicle- treated control group.
3. Insulin Secretion:
Compounds that enhance insulin secretion from the pancreas will increase plasma insulin levels and improve the disappearance of plasma glucose following the administration of a glucose load. When measuring insulin levels, compounds are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c. or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice. At the appropriate time an intravenous glucose load (0.4g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later. Plasma insulin levels are determined. Compounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose. When measuring glucose disappearance, animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or infraperitoneal glucose load (lg/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60 and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined. Compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
Compounds that enhance insulin secretion from the pancreas will increase plasma insulin levels and improve the disappearance of plasma glucose following the administration of a glucose load. When measuring insulin levels, test compounds which regulate pristanoyl-CoA oxidase-like enzyme are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c, or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice. At the appropriate time an intravenous glucose load (0.4g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later. Plasma insulin levels are determined. Test compounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose. When measuring glucose disappearance, animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or infraperitoneal glucose load (lg/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60, and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined. Test compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose.
4. Glucose Production:
Over-production of glucose by the liver, due to an enhanced rate of gluconeogenesis, is the major cause of fasting hyperglycemia in diabetes. Overnight fasted normal rats or mice have elevated rates of gluconeogenesis as do streptozotocin-induced diabetic rats or mice fed ad libitum. Rats are made diabetic with a single intravenous injection of 40 mg/kg of streptozotocin while C57BL/KsJ mice are given 40-60 mg/kg i.p. for 5 consecutive days. Blood glucose is measured from tail-tip blood and then compounds are administered via different routes (p.o., i.p., i.v., s.c). Blood is collected at various times thereafter and glucose measured. Alternatively, compounds are administered for several days, then the animals are fasted overnight, blood is collected and plasma glucose measured. Compounds that inhibit glucose production will decrease plasma glucose levels compared to the vehicle-freated control group.
5. Insulin Sensitivity:
Both ob/ob and db/db mice as well as diabetic Zucker rats are hyperglycemic, hyperinsulinemic and insulin resistant. The animals are pre-bled, their glucose levels measured, and then they are grouped so that the mean glucose level is the same for each group. Compounds are administered daily either q.d. or b.i.d. by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c.) for 7-28 days. Blood is collected at various times and plasma glucose and insulin levels determined. Compounds that improve insulin sensitivity in these models will decrease both plasma glucose and insulin levels when compared to the vehicle-treated confrol group.
6. Insulin Secretion:
Compounds that enhance insulin secretion from the pancreas will increase plasma insulin levels and improve the disappearance of plasma glucose following the administration of a glucose load. When measuring insulin levels, compounds are administered by different routes (p.o., i.p., s.c. or i.v.) to overnight fasted normal rats or mice. At the appropriate time an intravenous glucose load (0.4g/kg) is given, blood is collected one minute later. Plasma insulin levels are determined. Com- pounds that enhance insulin secretion will increase plasma insulin levels compared to animals given only glucose. When measuring glucose disappearance, animals are bled at the appropriate time after compound administration, then given either an oral or intraperitoneal glucose load (lg/kg), bled again after 15, 30, 60 and 90 minutes and plasma glucose levels determined. Compounds that increase insulin levels will decrease glucose levels and the area-under-the glucose curve when compared to the vehicle-treated group given only glucose. EXAMPLE 17
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
1. Pain: Acute Pain
Acute pain is measured on a hot plate mainly in rats. Two variants of hot plate testing are used: In the classical variant animals are put on a hot surface (52 to 56 C) and the latency time is measured until the animals show nocifensive behavior, such as stepping or foot licking. The other variant is an increasing temperature hot plate where the experimental animals are put on a surface of neutral temperature. Subsequently this surface is slowly but constantly heated until the animals begin to lick a hind paw. The temperature which is reached when hind paw licking begins is a measure for pain threshold.
Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated confrol group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t, i.c.v., s.c, infradennal, fransdermal) prior to pain testing.
Persistent Pain
Persistent pain is measured with the formalin or capsaicin test, mainly in rats. A solution of 1 to 5% formalin or 10 to 100 μg capsaicin is injected into one hind paw of the experimental animal. After formalin or capsaicin application the animals show nocifensive reactions like flinching, licking and biting of the affected paw. The number of nocifensive reactions within a time frame of up to 90 minutes is a measure for intensity of pain.
Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to formalin or capsaicin administration.
Neuropathic Pain
Neuropathic pain is induced by different variants of unilateral sciatic nerve injury mainly in rats. The operation is performed under anesthesia. The first variant of sciatic nerve injury is produced by placing loosely constrictive ligatures around the common sciatic nerve. The second variant is the tight ligation of about the half of the diameter of the common sciatic nerve. In the next variant, a group of models is used in which tight ligations or transections are made of either the L5 and L6 spinal nerves, or the L% spinal nerve only. The fourth variant involves an axotomy of two of the three terminal branches of the sciatic nerve (tibial and common peroneal nerves) leaving the remaining sural nerve intact whereas the last variant comprises the axotomy of only the tibial branch leaving the sural and common nerves uninjured. Control animals are treated with a sham operation.
Postoperatively, the nerve injured animals develop a chronic mechanical allodynia, cold allodynioa, as well as a thermal hyperalgesia. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc. -Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA; Electronic von Frey
System, Somedic Sales AB, Hδrby, Sweden). Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy), or by means of a cold plate of 5 to 10 C where the nocifensive reactions of the affected hind paw are counted as a measure of pain intensity. A further test for cold induced pain is the counting of nocifensive reactions, or duration of nocifensive responses after plantar administration of acetone to the affected hind limb. Chronic pain in general is assessed by registering the circadanian rhytms in activity (Surjo and Arndt, Universitat zu Kδln, Cologne, Germany), and by scoring differences in gait (foot print patterns; FOOTPRINTS program, Klapdor et al., 1997. A low cost method to analyse footprint patterns. J. Neurosci. Methods 75, 49-54). Compounds are tested against sham operated and vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t, i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal) prior to pain testing.
Inflammatory Pain
Inflammatory pain is induced mainly in rats by injection of 0.75 mg caπageenan or complete Freund's adjuvant into one hind paw. The animals develop an edema with mechanical allodynia as well as thermal hyperalgesia. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer,
IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA). Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy, Paw thermal stimulator, G. Ozaki, University of California, USA). For edema measurement two methods are being used. In the first method, the animals are sacrificed and the affected hindpaws sectioned and weighed. The second method comprises differences in paw volume by measuring water displacement in a plethysmometer (Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy).
Compounds are tested against uninflamed as well as vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal) prior to pain testing.
Diabetic Neuropathic Pain
Rats treated with a single infraperitoneal injection of 50 to 80 mg/kg streptozotocin develop a profound hyperglycemia and mechanical allodynia within 1 to 3 weeks. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA).
Compounds are tested against diabetic and non-diabetic vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v., i.p., p.o., i.t., i.c.v., s.c, intradermal, fransdermal) prior to pain testing.
2. Parkinson's disease
6-Hydroxydopamine (6-OH-DA) Lesion
Degeneration of the dopaminergic nigrostriatal and striatopallidal pathways is the central pathological event in Parkinson's disease. This disorder has been mimicked experimentally in rats using single/sequential unilateral stereotaxic injections of
6-OH-DA into the medium forebrain bundle (MFB).
Male Wistar rats (Harlan Winkelmann, Germany), weighing 200+250 g at the beginning of the experiment, are used. The rats are maintained in a temperature- and humidity-controlled environment under a 12 h light/dark cycle with free access to food and water when not in experimental sessions. The following in vivo protocols are approved by the governmental authorities. All efforts are made to minimize animal suffering, to reduce the number of animals used, and to utilize alternatives to in vivo techniques.
Animals are administered pargyline on the day of surgery (Sigma, St. Louis, MO, USA; 50 mg/kg i.p.) in order to inhibit metabolism of 6-OHDA by monoamine oxidase and desmethylimipramine HCl (Sigma; 25 mg/kg i.p.) in order to prevent uptake of 6-OHDA by noradrenergic terminals. Thirty minutes later the rats are anesthetized with sodium pentobarbital (50 mg/kg) and placed in a stereotaxic frame.
In order to lesion the DA nigrostriatal pathway 4 μl of 0.01% ascorbic acid-saline containing 8 μg of 6-OHDA HBr (Sigma) are injected into the left medial fore-brain bundle at a rate of 1 μl/min (2.4 mm anterior, 1.49 mm lateral, -2.7 mm ventral to Bregma and the skull surface). The needle is left in place an additional 5 min to allow diffusion to occur. Stepping Test
Forelimb akinesia is assessed three weeks following lesion placement using a modified stepping test protocol. In brief, the animals are held by the experimenter with one hand fixing the hindlimbs and slightly raising the hind part above the surface. One paw is touching the table, and is then moved slowly sideways (5 s for 1 m), first in the forehand and then in the backhand direction. The number of adjusting steps is counted for both paws in the backhand and forehand direction of movement. The sequence of testing is right paw forehand and backhand adjusting stepping, followed by left paw forehand and backhand directions. The test is repeated three times on three consecutive days, after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing. Forehand adjusted stepping reveals no consistent differences between lesioned and healthy control animals. Analysis is therefore restricted to backhand adjusted stepping.
Balance Test
Balance adjustments following postural challenge are also measured during the stepping test sessions. The rats are held in the same position as described in the stepping test and, instead of being moved sideways, tilted by the experimenter towards the side of the paw touching the table. This manoeuvre results in loss of balance and the ability of the rats to regain balance by forelimb movements is scored on a scale ranging from 0 to 3. Score 0 is given for a normal forelimb placement. When the forelimb movement is delayed but recovery of postural balance detected, score 1 is given. Score 2 represents a clear, yet insufficient, forelimb reaction, as evidenced by muscle contraction, but lack of success in recovering balance, and score 3 is given for no reaction of movement. The test is repeated three times a day on each side for three consecutive days after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing. Staircase Test (Paw Reaching)
A modified version of the staircase test is used for evaluation of paw reaching behaviour three weeks following primary and secondary lesion placement. Plexiglass test boxes with a cenfral platform and a removable staircase on each side are used.
The apparatus is designed such that only the paw on the same side at each staircase can be used, thus providing a measure of independent forelimb use. For each test the animals are left in the test boxes for 15 min. The double staircase is filled with 7 x 3 chow pellets (Precision food pellets, formula: P, purified rodent diet, size 45 mg; Sandown Scientific) on each side. After each test the number of pellets eaten
(successfully retrieved pellets) and the number of pellets taken (touched but dropped) for each paw and the success rate (pellets eaten/pellets taken) are counted separately. After three days of food deprivation (12 g per animal per day) the animals are tested for 11 days. Full analysis is conducted only for the last five days.
MPTP treatment
The neurotoxin l-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,6-tetrahydro-pyridine (MPTP) causes degeneration of mesencephalic dopaminergic (DAergic) neurons in rodents, non-human primates, and humans and, in so doing, reproduces many of the symptoms of Parkinson's disease. MPTP leads to a marked decrease in the levels of dopamine and its metabolites, and in the number of dopaminergic terminals in the striatum as well as severe loss of the tyrosine hydroxylase (TH)-immunoreactive cell bodies in the substantia nigra, pars compacta.
In order to obtain severe and long-lasting lesions, and to reduce mortality, animals receive single injections of MPTP, and are then tested for severity of lesion 7-10 days later. Successive MPTP injections are administered on days 1, 2 and 3. Animals receive application of 4 mg/kg MPTP hydrochloride (Sigma) in saline once daily. All injections are intraperitoneal (i.p.) and the MPTP stock solution is frozen between injections. Animals are decapitated on day 1 1. Immunohistology
At the completion of behavioral experiments, all animals are anaesthetized with 3 ml thiopental (1 g/40 ml i.p., Tyrol Pharma). The mice are perfused franscardially with
0.01 M PBS (pH 7.4) for 2 min, followed by 4% paraformaldehyde (Merck) in PBS for 15 min. The brains are removed and placed in 4% paraformaldehyde for 24 h at 4°C. For dehydration they are then fransfeπed to a 20%> sucrose (Merck) solution in 0.1 M PBS at 4°C until they sink. The brains are frozen in methylbutan at -20°C for 2 min and stored at -70°C. Using a sledge microtome (mod. 3800-Frigocut, Leica),
25 μm sections are taken from the genu of the coφus callosum (AP 1.7 mm) to the hippocampus (AP 21.8 mm) and from AP 24.16 to AP 26.72. Forty-six sections are cut and stored in assorters in 0.25 M Tris buffer (pH 7.4) for immunohistochemistry.
A series of sections is processed for free-floating tyrosine hydroxylase (TH) immunohistochemistry. Following three rinses in 0.1 M PBS, endogenous peroxi- dase activity is quenched for 10 min in 0.3% H2O2 ±PBS. After rinsing in PBS, sections are preincubated in 10% normal bovine serum (Sigma) for 5 min as blocking agent and transfeπed to either primary anti-rat TH rabbit antiserum (dilution 1 :2000).
Following overnight incubation at room temperature, sections for TH mmunoreactivity are rinsed in PBS (2 xlO min) and incubated in biotinylated anti-rabbit immunoglobulin G raised in goat (dilution 1:200) (Vector) for 90 min, rinsed repeatedly and transfeπed to Vectastain ABC (Vector) solution for 1 h. 3,.3'-Diaminobenzidine tefrahydrochlori.de (DAB; Sigma) in 0.1 M PBS, supplemented with 0.005%> H O2, serves as chromogen in the subsequent visualization reaction. Sections are mounted on to gelatin-coated slides, left to dry overnight, counter-stained with hematoxylin dehydrated in ascending alcohol concentrations and cleared in butylacetate. Covershps are mounted on entellan. Rotarod Test
We use a modification of the procedure described by Rozas and Labandeira-Garcia (1997), with a CR-1 Rotamex system (Columbus Instruments, Columbus, OH) comprising an IBM-compatible personal computer, a CIO-24 data acquisition card, a control unit, and a four-lane rotarod unit. The rotarod unit consists of a rotating spindle (diameter 7.3 cm) and individual compartments for each mouse. The system software allows preprogramming of session protocols with varying rotational speeds (0-80 φm). Infrared beams are used to detect when a mouse has fallen onto the base grid beneath the rotarod. The system logs the fall as the end of the experiment for that mouse, and the total time on the rotarod, as well as the time of the fall and all the set-up parameters, are recorded. The system also allows a weak cuπent to be passed through the base grid, to aid training.
3. Dementia
The object recognition task
The object recognition task has been designed to assess the effects of experimental manipulations on the cognitive performance of rodents. A rat is placed in an open field, in which two identical objects are present. The rats inspects both objects during the first trial of the object recognition task. In a second trial, after a retention interval of for example 24 hours, one of the two objects used int the first trial, the 'familiar' object, and a novel object are placed in the open field. The inspection time at each of the objects is registered. The basic measures in the OR task is the time spent by a rat exploring the two object the second trial. Good retention is reflected by higher exploitation times towards the novel than the 'familiar' object.
Administration of the putative cognition enhancer prior to the first trial predominantly allows assessment of the effects on acquisition, and eventually on consolidation processes. Administration of the testing compound after the first trial allows to assess the effects on consolidation processes, whereas administration before the second trial allows to measure effects on retrieval processes.
The passive avoidance task
The passive avoidance task assesses memory performance in rats and mice. The inhibitory avoidance apparatus consists of a two-compartment box with a light compartment and a dark compartment. The two compartments are separated by a guillotine door that can be operated by the experimenter. A threshold of 2 cm separates the two compartments when the guillotine door is raised. When the door is open, the illumination in the dark compartment is about 2 lux. The light intensity is about 500 lux at the center of the floor of the light compartment.
Two habituation sessions, one shock session, and a retention session are given, separated by inter-session intervals of 24 hours. In the habituation sessions and the retention session the rat is allowed to explore the apparatus for 300 sec. The rat is placed in the light compartment, facing the wall opposite to the guillotine door. After an accommodation period of 15 sec. the guillotine door is opened so that all parts of the apparatus can be visited freely. Rats normally avoid brighly lit areas and will enter the dark compartment within a few seconds.
In the shock session the guillotine door between the compartments is lowered as soon as the rat has entered the dark compartment with its four paws, and a scrambled 1 mA footshock is administered for 2 sec. The rat is removed from the apparatus and put back into its home cage. The procedure during the retention session is identical to that of the habituation sessions.
The step-through latency, that is the first latency of entering the dark compartment (in sec.) during the retention session is an index of the memory performance of the animal; the longer the latency to enter the dark compartment, the better the retention is. A testing compound in given half an hour before the shock session, together with
1 mg*kg~' scopolamine. Scopolamine impairs the memory performance during the retention session 24 hours later. If the test compound increases the enter latency compared with the scopolamine-treated confrols, is is likely to possess cognition enhancing potential.
The Morris water escape task
The Morris water escape task measures spatial orientation learning in rodents. It is a test system that has extensively been used to investigate the effects of putative therapeutic on the cognitive functions of rats and mice. The performance of an animal is assessed in a circular water tank with an escape platform that is submerged about 1 cm below the surface of the water. The escape platform is not visible for an animal swimming in the water tank. Abundant extra-maze cues are provided by the furniture in the room, including desks, computer equipment, a second water tank, the presence of the experimenter, and by a radio on a shelf that is playing softly.
The animals receive four trials during five daily acquisition sessions. A trial is started by placing an anmimal into the pool, facing the wall of the tank. Each of four starting positions in the quadrants north, east, south, and west is used once in a series of four trials; their order is randomized. The escape platform is always in the same position. A trial is terminated as soon as the animal had climbs onto the escape platform or when 90 seconds have elapsed, whichever event occurs first. Teh animal is allowed to stay on the platform for 30 seconds. Then it is taken from the platform and the next trial is started. If an amimal did not find the platform within 90 seconds it is put on the platform by the experimenter and is allowed to stay there for 30 seconds. After the fourth trial of the fifth daily session, an additional trial is given as a probe trial: the platform is removed, and the time the animal spents in the four quadrants is measured for 30 or 60 seconds. In the probe trial, all animals start from the same start position, opposite to the quadrant where the escape platform had been positioned during acquisition.
Four different measures are taken to evaluate the performance of an animal during acquisition training: escape latency, traveled distance, distance to platform, and swimming speed. The following measures are evaluated for the probe trial: time (s) in quadrants and traveled distance (cm) in the four quadrants. The probe trial provides additional information about how well an animal learned the position of the escape platform. If an animal spents more time and swims a longer distance in the quadrant where the platform had been positioned during the acquisition sessions than in any other quadrant, one concludes that the platform position has been learned well.
In order to assess the effects of putative congition enhacing compounds, rats or mice with specific brain lesions which impair cognitive functions, or animals treated with compounds such as scopolamine or MK-801, which interfere with normal learning, or aged animals which suffer from cognitive deficits, are used.
The T-maze spontaneous alternation task
The T-maze spontaneous alternation task (TeMCAT) assesses the spatial memory performance in mice. The start arm and the two goal arms of the T-maze are provided with guillotine doors which can be operated manually by the experimenter. A mouse is put into the start arm at the beginning of training. The guillotine door is closed. In the first trial, the 'forced trial', either the left or right goal arm is blocked by lowering the guillotine door. After the mouse has been released from the start arm, it will negotiate the maze, eventually enter the open goal arm, and return to the start position, where it will be confined for 5 seconds, by lowering the guillotine door. Then, the animal can choose freely between the left and right goal arm (all guillotine-doors opened) diring 14 'free choice' trials. As soon a the mouse has entered one goal arm, the other one is closed. The mouse eventually returns to the start arm and is free to visit whichever goalarm it wants after having been confined to the start arm for 5 seconds. After completion of 14 free choice trials in one session, the animal is removed from the maze. During training, the animal is never handeled.
The per-cent alternations out of 14 trials is calculated. This per-centage and the total time needed to complete the first forced trial and the subsequent 14 free choice trials (in s) is analysed. Cognitive deficits are usually induced by an injection of scopolamine, 30 min before the start of the training session. Scopolamine reduced the per-cent alternations to chance level, or below. A cognition enhancer, which is always administered before the training session, will at least partially, antagonize the scopolamine-induced reduction in the spontaneous alternation rate.
REFERENCES
Ahren, B. and S. Lindskog (1992) Int. J. Pancreatol. 11:147-160.
Amiranoff, B. A. M. Lorinet, and M. Laburthe (1991) Eur. J. Biochem. 195:459-463.
Amiranoff, B. A. L. Servin, C. Rouyer-Fessard, A. Couvineau, K. Tatemoto, and M. Laburthe (1987) Endocrin. 121:284-289.
Aruffo, A. and B. Seed (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 84:8573-8577.
Bhathena, S. J., H. K. Oie, A. F. Gazdar, N. R. Voyles, S. D. Wilkins, and L. Recant (1982) Diabetes 31:521-531.
Bartfai, T., K. Bedecs, T. Land, U. Langel, R. Bertorelli, P. Girotti, S. Consolo, Y.-J. Yu, Z. Weisenfeld-Hallin, S. Nilsson, V. Pieribone, and T. Hokfelt (1991) Proc. Natl.
Acad. Sci. USA 88:10961-10965.
Bartfai, T., T. Hokfelt, and U. Langel, Crit. Rev. Neurobiol. 7:229-274.
Bartfai, T., U. Langel, K. Bedecs, S. Andell, T. Land, S. Gregersen, B. Ahren, P.
Girotti, S. Consolo, R. Corwin, J. Crawley, X. Xu, Z. Weisenfeld-Hallin, and T. Hokfelt (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 88:11287-11291.
Bennet, W. M., S. F. Hill, M. A. Ghatei, and S. R. Bloom (1991) J. Endocrin. 130:463-467. Borden, L. A., K. E. Smith., P. R. Hartig, T. A. Branchek, and R. L.
Weinshank (1992) J. Biol. Chem. 267:21098-21 104. Borden, L. A., K. E. Smith, E. L. Gustafson, T. A. Branchek, and R. L. Weinshank (1994) J. Neurochem. In Press.
Boyle, M. R, C. B. Verchere, G. McKnight, S. Mathews, K. Walker, and G. J.
Taborsky, Jr. (1994) Reg. Peptides 50:1-11.
Bradford, M. M. (1976). A rapid and sensitive method for the quantitation of microgram quantities of protein utilizing the principle of protein-dye binding. Anal. Biochem. 72:248-254.
Burbach, J. P. and O. C. Meijer (1992) Eur. J. Pharmacol. 227:1-18.
Burgevin, M.-C, Loquet, I., Quarteronet, D., and Habert-Ortoli, E. (1995) J. Molec Neurosci., 6:33-41.
Bush, A. W., Borden, L. A., Greene, L. A., and Maxfield, F. R. (1991) J. Neurochem. 57:562-574.
Chan-Palay, V. (1988) J. Comp. Neurol. 273:543-557. Chen, Y., A. Founder, A.
Couvineau, M. Laburthe, and B. Amiranoff (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:3845-3849.
Chirgwin, J. M., A. E. Przybyla, R. J. MacDonald, and W. J. Rutter. (1979) Biochemistry 18:5294-5299.
Consolo, S., R. Bertorelli, P. Girotti, C. La Porta, T. Bartfai, M. Parenti, and M. Zambelli (1991) Neurosci. Lett. 126:29-32.
Crawley, J. N. (1993) Behav. Brain Res. 57:133-141. Crawley, J. N., J. K. Robinson, U. Langel, and T. Bartfai (1993) Brain. Res. 600:268- 272.
Cullen, B. (1987). Use of eurkaryotic expression technology in the functional analysis of cloned genes. Methods Enzymol. 152:685-704.
D'Andrea, A. D., H. F. Lodish, and G. W. Gordon (1989) Cell 57:277-285.
Fisone, G., C. F. Wu, S. Consolo, O. Nordsfrom, N. Brynne, T. Bartfai, T. Melander, T. Hokfelt (1987) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci USA 84:7339.
Gearing, D. P., King, J. A., Gough, N. M. and Nicola N. A. (1989) EMBO J. 8:3667- 3676.
Gerald, C, M. Walker, T. Branchek, and R. Weinshank (1994) DNA Encoding a
Human Neuropeptide Y/Peptide YY (Y2) Receptor and Uses Thereof, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 08/192,288, filed Feb. 3, 1994.
Gillison, S. L., and W. G. Shaφ (1994) Diabetes 43:24-32. Gregersen, S., S. Lindskog, T. Land, U. Langel, T. Bartfai, and B. Ahren (1993) Eur J. Pharmacol.
232:35-39.
Gu, Z.-F., W. J. Rossowski, D. H. Coy, T. K. Pradhan, and R. T. Jensen (1993) J. Phamacol. Exper. Ther. 266:912-918.
Gu, Z.-F., Pradhan, T. K., Coy, D. H., and Jensen, R. T. (1995) J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther., 272:371-378.
Gubler, U abd B. J. Hoffman. (1983). A simple and very efficient method for generating cDNA libraries. Gene. 25, 263-269 Gustafson, E. L., Smith, K. E., Durkin, M. M., Gerald, C, and Branchek, T. A. (1996) Neuroreport, in press.
Habert-Ortoli, E., Amiranoff, B., Loquet, I., Laburthe, M., and J.-F. Mayaux (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91. -9780-9783.
Hedlund, P. B., N. Yanaihara, and K. Fuxe (1992) Eur. J. Pharm. 224:203-205.
Heuillet, E., Bouaiche, Z., Menager, J., Dugay, P., Munoz, N., Dubois, H., Amiranoff, B.,- Crespo, A., Lavayre, J., Blanchard, J.-C, and Doble, A. (1994) Eur. J.
Pharmacol., 269:139-147.
Kaplan, L. M., S. M. Gabriel, J. I. Koenig, M. E. Sunday, E. R. Spindel, J. B. Martin, and W. W. Chin (1988) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85:7408-7412.
Kieffer, B., Befort, K., Gaveriaux-Ruff, C. and Hirth, C. G. (1992). The .delta.- opioid receptor.Isolation of a cDNA by expression cloning and pharmacological characterization. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:12048-12052.
Kluxen, F. W., Bruns, C. and Lubbert H. (1992). Expression cloning of a rat brain somatostatin receptor cDNA. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:4618-4622.
Komfeld, R. and Komfeld, S. (1985). Assembly of asparagine linked oligo- saccharides. Annu. Rev. Biochem. 54:631-664.
Kozak, M. (1989). The scanning model for translation: an update. J. Cell Biol. 108:229-241.
Kozak, M. (1991). Structural features in eukaryotic mRNAs that modulate the initiation of translation. J. Biol. Chem. 266:19867-19870. Kyrkouli, S. E., B. G. Stanley, R. D. Seirafi and S. F. Leibowitz (1990) Peptides 11:995-1001.
Lagny-Pourmir, I., A. M. Lorinet, N. Yanaihara, and M. Laburthe (1989) Peptides 10:757-761.
Landschultz, W. H., Johnson, P. F. and S. L. McKnight. (1988). The leucine zipper: a hypothetical structure common to a new class of DNA binding proteins. Science 240:1759-1764.
Leibowitz, S. F. and T. Kim (1992) Brain Res. 599:148-152.
Maggio, R., Vogel Z. and J. Wess. (1993). Coexpression studies with mutant muscarinic/adrenergic receptors provide evidence for intermolecular "cross-talk" between G-protein-linked receptors. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:3103-3107.
McCormick, M. (1987). Sib Selection. Methods in Enzymoloay, 151:445-449.
Melander, T., C. Kohler, S. Nilsson, T. Hokfelt, E. Brodin, E. Theodorsson, and T. Bartfai (1988) J. Chem. Neuroanat. 1:213-233.
Merchenthaler, I., F. J. Lopez, and A. Negro-Vilar (1993) Prog. Neurobiol. 40:711- 769.
Miller, J. and Germain, R. N. (1986). Efficient cell surface expression of class II
MHC molecules in the absence of associated invariant chain. J. Exp. Med. 164: 1478-1489.
Ogren, S.-O., T. Hokfelt, K. Kask, U. Langel, and T. Bartfai (1992) Neurosci. 51:1. Palazzi, E., G. Fisone, T. Hokfelt, T. Bartfai, and S. Consolo (1988) Eur. J. Pharmacol. 148:479.
Parker, E. M., Izzarelli, D., Nowak, H., Mahle, C, Iben, L., Wang, J., and Goldstein, M. E. (1996) Mol. Brain Res., 34:179-189.
Post, C, L. Alari, and T. Hokfelt (1988) Acta Physiol. Scand. 132:583.
Probst, W. C, Snyder, L. A., Schuster, D. I., Brosius, J and Sealfon, S. C. (1992). Sequence alignment of the G-protein coupled receptor superfamily. DNA and Cell
Bio. 11:1-20.
Sanger, S. (1977) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 74:5463-5467.
Servin, A. L., B. Amiranoff, C. Rouyer-Fessard, K. Tatemoto, and M. Laburthe
(1987) Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 144:298-306.
ShenN., Monsma, F. J. Jr., Metcalf, M. A., Jose, P. A., Hambhn, M. W., and Sibley, D. R. (1993Molecular Cloning and Expression of a 5-Hydroxytryptamine.sub.7 Serotonin Receptor Subtype. J. Biol. Chem. 268:18200-18204.
Sims, J. E., C. J. March, D. Cosman, M. B. Widmer, H. R. Macdonald, C. J. McMahan, C. E. Grubin, J. M. Wignal, J. L. Jackson, S. M. Call, D. Freind, A. R. Alpert, S. Gillis, D. L. Urdal, and S. K. Dower (1988) Science 241:585-588.
Skofitsch, G. and D. M. Jacobowitz (1985) Peptides 6:509-546.
Skofitsch, G., M. A. Sills, and D. M. Jacobowitz (1986) Peptides 7:1029-1042.
Smith, K. E., L. A. Borden, P. R. Hartig, T. Branchek, and R. L. Weinshank (1992)
Neuron 8:927-935. Smith, K. E., L. A. Borden, C-H. D. Wang, P. R. Hartig, T. A. Branchek, and R. L. Weinshank (1992a) Mol. Pharmacol. 42:563-569.
Smith, K. E., S. G. Fried, M. M. Durkin, E. L. Gustafson, L. A. Borden, T. A.
Branchek, and R. L. Weinshank (1994) FEBS Letters, In press.
Sundstrom, E., T. Archer, T. Melander, and T. Hokfelt (1988) Neurosci. Lett. 88:331. Tempel, D. L., K. J. Leibowitz, and S. F. Leibowitz (1988) Peptides 9:300-314.
Vrontakis, M. E., L. M. Peden, M. L Duckworth, and H. G. Friesen (1987) J. Biol. Chem. 262:16755-16760.
Warden, D. and H. V. Thome. (1968). Infectivity of polyoma virus DNA for mouse embryo cells in presence of diethylaminoethyl-dextran. J. Gen. Virol. 3:371.
Wiesenfeld-Hallin, Z., X. J. Xu, J. X. Hao, and T. Hokfelt (1993) Acta Physiol. Scand. 147:457-458.
Wiesenfeld-Hallin, Z., et al. (1992) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 89:3334-3337.
Wynick D., D. M. Smith, M. Ghatei, K. Akinsanya, R. Bhogal, P. Purkiss, P. Byfield, N. Yanaihara, and S. R. Bloom (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:4231- 4245

Claims

1. An isolated polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide and being selected from the group consisting of:
a) a polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
amino acid sequences which are at least about 50%> identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
b) a polynucleotide comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NOS: lor 3;
c) a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent conditions to a polynucleotide specified in (a) and (b);
d) a polynucleotide the sequence of which deviates from the polynucleotide sequences specified in (a) to (c) due to the degeneration of the genetic code; and
e) a polynucleotide which represents a fragment, derivative or allelic variation of a polynucleotide sequence specified in (a) to (d).
2. An expression vector containing any polynucleotide of claim 1.
3. A host cell containing the expression vector of claim 2.
4. A substantially purified galanin receptor-like polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide of claim 1.
5. A method for producing a galanin receptor-like polypeptide, wherein the method comprises the following steps:
a) culturing the host cell of claim 3 under conditions suitable for the expression of the galanin receptor-like polypeptide; and
b) recovering the galanin receptor-like polypeptide from the host cell culture.
6. A method for detection of a polynucleotide encoding a galanin receptor-like polypetide in a biological sample comprising the following steps:
a) hybridizing any polynucleotide of claim 1 to a nucleic acid material of a biological sample, thereby forming a hybridization complex; and
b) detecting said hybridization complex.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein before hybridization, the nucleic acid material of the biological sample is amplified.
8. A method for the detection of a polynucleotide of claim 1 or a galanin receptor-like polypeptide of claim 5 comprising the steps of contacting a biological sample with a reagent which specifically interacts with the polynucleotide or the galanin receptor-like polypeptide.
9. A diagnostic kit for conducting the method of any one of claims 6 to 8.
10. A method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a galanin receptor-like GPCR, comprising the steps of: - Ill -
contacting a test compound with any galanin receptor-like polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of claim 1;
detecting binding of the test compound of the galanin receptor-like poly- peptide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polypeptide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of a galanin receptor-like GPCR.
11. A method of screening for agents which regulate the activity of a galanin receptor-like GPCR, comprising the steps of:
contacting a test compound with a galanin receptor-like polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of claim 1; and
detecting a galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide, wherein a test compound which increases the galanin receptor-like GPCR activity is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for increasing the activity of the galanin receptor-like GPCR, and wherein a test compound which decreases the galanin receptor-like GPCR activity of the polypeptide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of the galanin receptorlike GPCR.
12. A method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a galanin receptor-like GPCR, comprising the steps of:
contacting a test compound with any polynucleotide of claim 1 and
detecting binding of the test compound to the polynucleotide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR.
13. A method of reducing the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR, comprising the steps of:
contacting a cell with a reagent which specifically binds to any poly- nucleotide of claim 1 or any galanin receptor-like polypeptide of claim 4, whereby the activity of galanin receptor-like GPCR is reduced.
14. A reagent that modulates the activity of a galanin receptor-like polypeptide or a polynucleotide wherein said reagent is identified by the method of any of the claims 10 to 12.
15. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising:
the expression vector of claim 2 or the reagent of claim 14 and a pharma- ceutically acceptable carrier.
16. Use of the pharmaceutical composition of claim 15 for modulating the activity of a galanin receptor-like GPCR in a pathophysiological disorder.
17. Use of claim 16 wherein the disorder is eating disorder, including obesity, diabetes, cardiovascular disease, asthma, pain, depression, ischemia, Alzheimer's disease, sleep disorder, migraine, anxiety, and reproductive disorder.
18. Use of the pharmaceutical composition of claim 15 for modulating the activity of a galanin receptor-like GPCR in cognition, analgesia, sensory processing, processing or visceral information, motor coordination, modulation of dopaminergic activity, and neuroendocrine function.
PCT/EP2001/002925 2000-03-16 2001-03-15 Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor Ceased WO2001068843A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU44207/01A AU4420701A (en) 2000-03-16 2001-03-15 Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor
EP01917091A EP1268779A1 (en) 2000-03-16 2001-03-15 Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18989800P 2000-03-16 2000-03-16
US60/189,898 2000-03-16
US21098300P 2000-06-12 2000-06-12
US60/210,983 2000-06-12
US25151500P 2000-12-07 2000-12-07
US60/251,515 2000-12-07

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2001068843A1 true WO2001068843A1 (en) 2001-09-20

Family

ID=27392650

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2001/002925 Ceased WO2001068843A1 (en) 2000-03-16 2001-03-15 Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor

Country Status (3)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1268779A1 (en)
AU (1) AU4420701A (en)
WO (1) WO2001068843A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002026823A3 (en) * 2000-09-27 2002-11-07 Bristol Myers Squibb Co A novel human g-protein coupled receptor, hgprbmy7, expressed highly in spinal cord
KR20220118954A (en) * 2021-02-19 2022-08-26 고려대학교 산학협력단 Treatment of nerve injury with 5'UTR of Gpr151 or mutant thereof

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1999031130A1 (en) * 1997-12-17 1999-06-24 Merck & Co., Inc. Galanin receptor galr3 and nucleotides encoding same
WO2001014577A1 (en) * 1999-08-24 2001-03-01 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Molecular cloning of a galanin like 7tm receptor (axor40)
EP1090989A1 (en) * 1999-10-08 2001-04-11 Pfizer Limited Human g-protein-coupled receptor

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1999031130A1 (en) * 1997-12-17 1999-06-24 Merck & Co., Inc. Galanin receptor galr3 and nucleotides encoding same
WO2001014577A1 (en) * 1999-08-24 2001-03-01 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Molecular cloning of a galanin like 7tm receptor (axor40)
EP1090989A1 (en) * 1999-10-08 2001-04-11 Pfizer Limited Human g-protein-coupled receptor

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DATABASE EMBL [online] 7 October 1999 (1999-10-07), DOE JOINT GENOME INSTITUTE: "Sequencing of Human Chromosome 5", XP002159212, retrieved from EBI Database accession no. AC011375 *
IISMAA TP ET AL: "Galanin and galanin receptors.", RESULTS AND PROBLEMS IN CELL DIFFERENTIATION, 1999, 26;P257-91, GERMANY, XP001010097 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2002026823A3 (en) * 2000-09-27 2002-11-07 Bristol Myers Squibb Co A novel human g-protein coupled receptor, hgprbmy7, expressed highly in spinal cord
KR20220118954A (en) * 2021-02-19 2022-08-26 고려대학교 산학협력단 Treatment of nerve injury with 5'UTR of Gpr151 or mutant thereof
KR102750427B1 (en) 2021-02-19 2025-01-09 재단법인대구경북과학기술원 Treatment of nerve injury with 5'UTR of Gpr151 or mutant thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU4420701A (en) 2001-09-24
EP1268779A1 (en) 2003-01-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1364026B1 (en) Human g protein-coupled receptor
US20040053244A1 (en) Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor
US20030139341A1 (en) Regulation of human lgr4-like g protein -coupled receptor
US20030166600A1 (en) Regulation of human isotocin-like g protein-coupled receptor
US20040096847A1 (en) Regulation of human secretin receptor-like gpcr
US20040136981A1 (en) Regulation of human histamine h2-like g protein-coupled receptor
EP1268779A1 (en) Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor
US20030073115A1 (en) Regulation of human galanin receptor-like g protein coupled receptor
US20010041355A1 (en) Regulation of human nerve growth factor-related G protein-coupled receptor
US20040091863A1 (en) Regulation of human leukotriene b4-like g protein-coupled receptor
EP1287135A2 (en) Regulation of human follicle stimulating hormone-like g protein-coupled receptor
US20050064404A1 (en) Regulation of human serotonin-like g protein-coupled receptor
US20040058350A1 (en) Regulation of human secretin receptor-like gpcr
US20030148451A1 (en) Endothelial differntiation gene 6-like g protein coupled receptor
WO2002099107A2 (en) Regulation of human trace amine receptor ta5
WO2001070967A2 (en) Regulation of human serotonin-like g protein-coupled receptor
US20030114643A1 (en) Regulation of human serotonin-like g protein-coupled receptor
WO2002101043A2 (en) Regulation of human ta4 receptor
US20040143092A1 (en) Regulation of human dorsal root receptor-like g protein-coupled receptor
WO2004009630A1 (en) Regulation of human serotonin receptor
US20040039170A1 (en) Regulation of human g protein-coupled receptor
WO2003004530A1 (en) Regulation of human somatostatin receptor-like protein
US20060121554A1 (en) Regulation of human RTA-like GPCR
WO2002000701A2 (en) Regulation of human gonadotropin releasing hormone receptor-like g protein-coupled receptor
WO2001092296A2 (en) Regulation of human isotocin-like g protein-coupled receptor

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2001917091

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 10221737

Country of ref document: US

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2001917091

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

WWR Wipo information: refused in national office

Ref document number: 2001917091

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 2001917091

Country of ref document: EP